US20030228358A1 - Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials - Google Patents

Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20030228358A1
US20030228358A1 US10/355,747 US35574703A US2003228358A1 US 20030228358 A1 US20030228358 A1 US 20030228358A1 US 35574703 A US35574703 A US 35574703A US 2003228358 A1 US2003228358 A1 US 2003228358A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
drug
forming material
lipophilic microphase
composition
concentration
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/355,747
Inventor
Michael Perlman
Ravi Shanker
Walter Babcock
Dwayne Friesen
Mark Rabenstein
Dan Smithey
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Lonza Bend Inc
Original Assignee
Pfizer Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=27663287&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20030228358(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Pfizer Inc filed Critical Pfizer Inc
Priority to US10/355,747 priority Critical patent/US20030228358A1/en
Publication of US20030228358A1 publication Critical patent/US20030228358A1/en
Priority to US11/924,988 priority patent/US9486410B2/en
Assigned to BEND RESEARCH, INC. reassignment BEND RESEARCH, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PFIZER PRODUCTS INC., PFIZER INC.
Priority to US15/268,441 priority patent/US20170000733A1/en
Priority to US16/047,965 priority patent/US10357455B2/en
Assigned to LONZA BEND INC. reassignment LONZA BEND INC. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BEND RESEARCH, INC.
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10Dispersions; Emulsions
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/47Quinolines; Isoquinolines
    • A61K31/47064-Aminoquinolines; 8-Aminoquinolines, e.g. chloroquine, primaquine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/496Non-condensed piperazines containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. rifampin, thiothixene or sparfloxacin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/141Intimate drug-carrier mixtures characterised by the carrier, e.g. ordered mixtures, adsorbates, solid solutions, eutectica, co-dried, co-solubilised, co-kneaded, co-milled, co-ground products, co-precipitates, co-evaporates, co-extrudates, co-melts; Drug nanoparticles with adsorbed surface modifiers
    • A61K9/146Intimate drug-carrier mixtures characterised by the carrier, e.g. ordered mixtures, adsorbates, solid solutions, eutectica, co-dried, co-solubilised, co-kneaded, co-milled, co-ground products, co-precipitates, co-evaporates, co-extrudates, co-melts; Drug nanoparticles with adsorbed surface modifiers with organic macromolecular compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/16Agglomerates; Granulates; Microbeadlets ; Microspheres; Pellets; Solid products obtained by spray drying, spray freeze drying, spray congealing,(multiple) emulsion solvent evaporation or extraction
    • A61K9/1605Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/1629Organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K9/1652Polysaccharides, e.g. alginate, cellulose derivatives; Cyclodextrin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/20Pills, tablets, discs, rods
    • A61K9/2004Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/2013Organic compounds, e.g. phospholipids, fats
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/20Pills, tablets, discs, rods
    • A61K9/2004Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/2022Organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K9/2031Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, polyethylene oxide, poloxamers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/20Pills, tablets, discs, rods
    • A61K9/2004Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/2022Organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K9/205Polysaccharides, e.g. alginate, gums; Cyclodextrin
    • A61K9/2054Cellulose; Cellulose derivatives, e.g. hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/48Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
    • A61K9/4841Filling excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/4858Organic compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/48Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
    • A61K9/4841Filling excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/4866Organic macromolecular compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/141Intimate drug-carrier mixtures characterised by the carrier, e.g. ordered mixtures, adsorbates, solid solutions, eutectica, co-dried, co-solubilised, co-kneaded, co-milled, co-ground products, co-precipitates, co-evaporates, co-extrudates, co-melts; Drug nanoparticles with adsorbed surface modifiers
    • A61K9/145Intimate drug-carrier mixtures characterised by the carrier, e.g. ordered mixtures, adsorbates, solid solutions, eutectica, co-dried, co-solubilised, co-kneaded, co-milled, co-ground products, co-precipitates, co-evaporates, co-extrudates, co-melts; Drug nanoparticles with adsorbed surface modifiers with organic compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/16Agglomerates; Granulates; Microbeadlets ; Microspheres; Pellets; Solid products obtained by spray drying, spray freeze drying, spray congealing,(multiple) emulsion solvent evaporation or extraction
    • A61K9/1605Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/1617Organic compounds, e.g. phospholipids, fats

Definitions

  • the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material that enhances the concentration of the drug in a use environment.
  • Low-solubility drugs often show poor bioavailability or irregular absorption, the degree of irregularity being affected by factors such as dose level, fed state of the patient, and form of the drug.
  • Increasing the bioavailability of low-solubility drugs has been the subject of much research.
  • Increasing bioavailability depends on improving the concentration of dissolved drug in solution to improve absorption.
  • the amorphous form of a low-solubility drug that is capable of existing in either the crystalline or amorphous form may temporarily provide a greater aqueous concentration of drug relative to the equilibrium concentration obtained by dissolution of the drug in a use environment.
  • Such amorphous forms may consist of the amorphous drug alone, a dispersion of the drug in a matrix material, or the drug adsorbed onto a substrate. It is believed that such amorphous forms of the drug may dissolve more rapidly than the crystalline form, often dissolving faster than the drug can precipitate from solution. As a result, the amorphous form may temporarily provide a greater-than equilibrium concentration of drug.
  • Curatolo et al. EP 0901786A2 disclose that a component of the dispersion may be a surface-active agent such as a fatty acid and alkyl sulfonate, commercial surfactants such as benzethanium chloride, docusate sodium, and polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, and natural surfactants.
  • a component of the dispersion may be a surface-active agent such as a fatty acid and alkyl sulfonate, commercial surfactants such as benzethanium chloride, docusate sodium, and polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, and natural surfactants.
  • Curatolo et al. state that these surface active agents may comprise up to 25% of the dispersion. In addition, Curatolo et al. also disclose that surface active agents may be present in compositions containing dispersions.
  • the present invention overcomes the drawbacks of the prior art by providing a composition comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer
  • a lipophilic microphase-forming material results in improved dissolved concentration of the drug in the aqueous use environment, and in some embodiments a surprising synergy.
  • the combination may either provide higher bioavailability with the same amount of concentration-enhancing polymer, or may provide the same bioavailability but with less concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer is co-administered with a lipophilic microphase-forming material to an in vivo use environment.
  • Another aspect of the invention comprises a kit comprising a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and a lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the present inventors have found that the ability of a solid amorphous dispersion to enhance the concentration of drug in a use environment may be significantly improved by the addition of certain lipophilic microphase-forming materials.
  • These lipophilic microphase-forming materials when administered to an aqueous use environment such as the GI tract, form a plurality of small microphases, or so-called “lipophilic microphases.”
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming materials are chosen (1) to be water immiscible, (2) so that the drug has a high partition coefficient with respect to the lipophilic microphases, and (3) so that the resulting lipophilic microphases in the aqueous use environment are small.
  • composition of the present invention comprising a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and a lipophilic microphase-forming material are introduced to a use environment such as the GI tract, the drug may be present in several different species.
  • the aqueous use environment is either the GI tract of an animal, or an in vitro use environment that simulates the GI tract of an animal, it is believed that at least five different drug species are formed: (1) free drug; (2) drug present within bile salt micelles that are naturally occurring in the GI tract; (3) polymer/drug assemblies; (4) precipitate; and (5) drug in lipophilic microphases.
  • free drug refers to drug molecules which are dissolved in the aqueous solution and are generally either monomeric or clusters of no more than about 100 molecules.
  • a “polymer/drug assembly” refers to a collection of polymer molecules and drug molecules which are physically associated to form an assembly or aggregate that is sufficiently small that it remains suspended in solution.
  • Precipitate is a general term for any relatively large particulates that form and fall out of solution, either naturally or upon centrifugation.
  • Such precipitate may comprise one or more or all of the following forms: (1) crystalline drug; (2) amorphous drug; and/or (3) a mixture of drug and polymer that is present as particles that are sufficiently large so as to drop out of solution (typically greater than about 5 to 10 microns in average diameter).
  • total dissolved drug refers to the concentration of drug in a use environment that is not present in precipitate.
  • total dissolved drug refers to drug that is present as free drug, drug within bile salt micelles, drug in polymer/drug assemblies, and drug in the lipophilic microphases.
  • the present invention provides one or more of the following advantages over prior methods for enhancing the concentration and bioavailability of low-solubility drugs.
  • the lipophilic microphases are capable of sufficiently solubilizing the drug in the use environment to enhance bioavailability.
  • the lipophilic microphases are thought to be (1) highly mobile, meaning that they may diffuse more rapidly throughout the use environment than precipitate; and (2) labile, meaning that the drug may rapidly convert back and forth between the lipophilic microphases and free drug. It is believed that the lipophilic microphases may be more mobile than the polymer/drug assemblies. Because the lipophilic microphases solubilize the drug, the lipophilic microphases may reduce the formation of drug precipitate and increase the amount of total dissolved drug.
  • the lability of the lipophilic microphases may also increase the rate of resupply of free drug in the use environment. As free drug is absorbed, drug present in the lipophilic microphases may rapidly convert to free drug, thus maintaining a sustained free drug concentration.
  • drug present in the lipophilic microphases may rapidly convert to free drug, thus maintaining a sustained free drug concentration.
  • the lipophilic microphases are small, their high mobility may also increase the rate of drug absorption by the intestines by increasing the transport rate of the drug through the unstirred boundary layer adjacent to the intestinal wall. In combination, these properties may greatly enhance the rate and extent of drug absorption (e.g., bioavailability).
  • compositions may also have the advantage of providing more regular absorption between the fed and fasted state of a patient.
  • a problem when dosing low-solubility, lipophilic drugs is that the absorption of the drug may vary widely between the fed and fasted state of the patient.
  • bile-salt micelles may be present in the GI tract. These micelles can behave in a similar way as the lipophilic microphase-forming materials of the present invention. It is believed that drug can readily partition into such bile-salt micelles, and drug in bile-salt micelles is readily absorbable because it is labile and the micelles are highly mobile.
  • compositions of the present invention comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material may minimize this fed/fasted difference in bioavailability.
  • the compositions tend to equalize the amount of drug present in highly labile, highly mobile species between the fed and fasted state, and thus provide a more uniform bioavailability between the fed and fasted state.
  • the present invention provides in one aspect a composition
  • a composition comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer, and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may either be present in the dispersion itself, may be mixed with the dispersion, or may be separate from but co-administered with the dispersion. Suitable lipophilic microphase-forming materials, drugs and polymers, and methods for making the compositions, are discussed in more detail below.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may comprise a surfactant and/or a lipophilic material.
  • the “lipophilic microphase-forming material” is intended to include blends of materials in addition to a single material.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material must (1) be water immiscible (2) be capable of forming a plurality of small lipophilic microphases in the use environment and (3) have a relatively high partition coefficient for the drug in the use environment.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material must be “water immiscible,”meaning that the material when administered as prescribed herein to an in vivo aqueous use environment exceeds its solubility as solvated molecules thus requiring the formation of a second phase.
  • a second phase takes the form of a large number of small phases such as micelles or a microemulsion.
  • the lipophilic microphase is a separate phase in the aqueous use environment; the separate phase ranging from extremely small aggregates such as micelles or as large droplets up to a few microns in size.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is not completely water soluble.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material also is capable of forming a plurality of small lipophilic microphases in an in vivo aqueous use environment without the need for stirring, agitation or other mechanical energy.
  • the material need not be self-emulsifying. Nevertheless, preferably the lipophilic microphase-forming material should not agglomerate into a single phase within the use environment, but should remain as a plurality of microphases for at least 1 hour and preferably longer.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material should form a plurality of microphases with at most only slight agitation of the use environment. The microphases remain small for at least 1 hour, and more preferably at least 4 hours, after administration to the use environment.
  • lipophilic materials that do not form a plurality of microphases when administered alone may often form such phases when administered with the polymer/drug solid amorphous dispersions. This is particularly true when the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug and the polymer in the solid amorphous dispersion.
  • the resulting lipophilic microphases formed in the aqueous use environment are small.
  • small is meant that the lipophilic microphase-forming material forms lipophilic microphases that are generally less than about 10 ⁇ m in characteristic diameter.
  • characteristic diameter is meant the volume average diameter of the microphase in the use environment. The characteristic diameter may be determined by standard measurement techniques, such as dynamic light scattering and static light scattering, or by examination via optical- or scanning-election microscopy, transmission-electron microscopy, coulter-counting methods, and size-exclusion field-flow fractionation.
  • the resulting particles may be smaller, such as less than 1 ⁇ m in characteristic diameter, less than 100 nm in characteristic diameter, and less than 50 nm in characteristic diameter.
  • the size of the microphases depends on the other components of the composition, such as the drug and polymer, the manner in which the components of the composition are combined, (such as having the lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersed within the polymer/drug dispersion), as well as the components of the use environment. This is particularly true in an in vivo use environment where the presence of proteins, bile salts, and other surface active agents may cause some compositions to form suitably small lipophilic microphases even though they do not form such microphases in in vitro tests. In addition, it is well known that, in the in vivo environment, many lipophilic microphase-forming materials such as mono-, di-, and tri-glycerides may undergo chemical conversion to other species that in time form the microphases. Thus the ultimate test of an appropriate lipophilic microphase-forming material and composition is best conducted in the in vivo use environment.
  • the lability of a drug from the free drug phase into and out of the lipophilic microphase is generally a function of the microphase size.
  • “lability” is meant the kinetics or rate of drug release or drug partitioning into or out of the microphase.
  • lability increases as the size of the microphase decreases.
  • the characteristic size of the microphase it is preferable for the characteristic size of the microphase to be smaller.
  • preferred compositions generally form microphases less than about 1 ⁇ m in characteristic diameter when dosed to the in vivo use environment.
  • the drug should also have a relatively high partition coefficient in the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • K p is the partition coefficient
  • [Drug] lipophile is the concentration of the drug in the lipophilic microphases
  • [Drug] free is the free drug concentration
  • X lipophile is the volume fraction of the lipophilic microphase in the use environment.
  • [Drug] aqueous,total [Drug] free ⁇ [1 +X lipophile ⁇ K p ]
  • the fraction of the total drug present within the lipophilic microphases generally increases with: (1) increasing K p , (2) increasing X lipophile , (3) increasing [Drug] free .
  • the mass of the tablet or capsule is generally less than about 1000 mg and preferably less than about 700 mg. Since a significant portion of the dosage form must also comprise the active drug and other excipients, the maximum amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material in a single oral dosage form is about 500 mg.
  • the aqueous volume into which the lipophilic microphase-forming material composition disperses is generally about 50 ml up to about 500 ml, depending on the fed state of the subject.
  • the maximum practical value for X lipophile is about 0.001 to 0.01.
  • the dose of the drug is 100 mg
  • concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase-forming material (in wt %) when the composition is dosed orally to a human is at least about 0.1 mg/500 mg or 0.02 wt % and preferably at least about 0.2 wt % (1 mg/500 mg).
  • the minimum K p may be determined by determining the K p necessary to achieve the desired concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase forming material. Since the concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase-forming material at equilibrium is given by:
  • the minimum K p may be determined by setting the free drug concentration, [Drug] free , to the maximum aqueous solubility of the drug, S xtal .
  • the minimum K p should generally be at least about 0.02 wt %/S xtal , preferably greater than about 0.2 wt %/S xtal , more preferably greater than about 0.5 wt %/S xtal , even more preferably greater than about 1 wt %/S xtal , and most preferably greater than about 2 wt %/S xtal .
  • K p should be greater than about 2 (0.02 wt %/0.01 wt %), preferably greater than about 20 (0.2 wt %/0.01 wt %), more preferably greater than about 50 (0.5 wt %/0.01 wt %), even more preferably greater than 100 (1 wt %/0.01 wt %), and most preferably greater than 200 (2 wt %/0.01 wt %).
  • K p for various drug solubilities are given as follows: Even More More More Most S xtal Preferred Preferred Preferred Preferred ( ⁇ g/ml) Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum [wt %] K p K p K p K p K p 100 2 20 50 100 200 [0.01] 10 20 200 500 1,000 2,000 [0.001] 1.0 200 2,000 5,000 10,000 20,000 [1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 ] 0.1 2,000 20,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 [1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 ] 0.01 20,000 200,000 500,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 [1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 ]
  • the partition coefficient K p for a drug in a particular lipophilic microphase-forming material may be determined by any method or series of experiments in which the concentration of drug present as free drug and drug present in lipophilic microphases can be determined.
  • One exemplary method is as follows. Crystalline drug (or amorphous drug if the crystalline form of the drug is not known) is added to an appropriate buffer solution such as PBS (described below) at an amount such that if all of the drug dissolved the concentration would be greater than the equilibrium solubility of the drug.
  • the concentration of free drug in the solution is then determined by any technique that can quantitatively measure the amount of dissolved drug in solution, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy.
  • HPLC high-performance liquid chromatography
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • crystalline drug is added to an appropriate buffer solution to which various amounts of the lipophilic microphase-forming material had been added, such as 1 vol %, 2 vol % and 3 vol %, again at an amount such that if all of the drug dissolved the concentration of drug either present as free drug or in the lipophilic microphase would be greater than the equilibrium solubility of the drug with the lipophilic microphase-forming material present.
  • the total concentration of total dissolved drug that is the sum of drug present as free drug plus drug present in lipophilic microphases, (as given in Equation II)—is determined using the same techniques described above.
  • the total dissolved drug concentration [Drug] aqueous,total is then plotted versus the vol % lipophilic microphase-forming material in the solution.
  • the slope of the line for this graph is equal to the product of the free drug concentration (which is normally assumed to be equal to the solubility of the drug in the absence of the lipophilic microphase-forming material, or S xtal ) and K p .
  • K p slope/S xtal .
  • the aqueous solubility of the lipophilic microphase-forming material or the “critical micelle concentration” (CMC) of the lipophilic microphase-forming material is very small relative to the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material used in the above experiment, the y-intercept of the line through the data points is approximately equal to the crystalline drug solubility, S xtal .
  • the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material used is only slightly larger than the CMC or the lipophilic microphase-forming material aqueous solubility, then the values of X lipophile should be corrected by subtracting the CMC or solubility from the total volume fraction of lipophilic microphase-forming material added to the solution.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is part of the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer.
  • the dispersion comprise no greater than 50 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material, preferably no greater than 40 wt %, more preferably no greater than 30 wt %.
  • T g glass-transition temperature
  • the addition of the lipophilic microphase-forming material also increases the solubility of the drug in the polymer plus lipophilic microphase-forming material matrix. As a result its addition may improve the stability of the dispersion regardless of its effect on T g .
  • the material, if crystalline, it is generally preferable for the material, if crystalline, to have a relatively high melting point and if amorphous to have a relatively high T g .
  • the melt temperature or T g of the lipophilic microphase-forming material should be sufficiently high such that the T g of the dispersion is at least 50° C.
  • the T g of the dispersion when tested under ambient humidity conditions (e.g., 50% relative humidity). More preferably, the T g of the dispersion is at least 70° C. at 50% relative humidity, and most preferably at least 100° C. at 50% relative humidity. Other factors, such as the T g of the drug, the T g of the concentration-enhancing polymer, the drug:polymer ratio, and the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material included in the dispersion may affect the T g of the dispersion, and these factors should be considered when selecting a lipophilic microphase-forming material to use in a composition.
  • the solid dosage form may take the form of one or more tablets or capsules or a multiplicity of particles or granules.
  • the dosage form may be taken orally by swallowing whole, chewed and then swallowed, or the dosage form may disintegrate and optionally dissolve in the mouth and then be swallowed.
  • the solid dosage form is a multiplicity of small particles or granules the powder or granules may be ingested by any known method, including first dispersing in an aqueous vehicle and then swallowing, or mixing with food and then ingesting along with the food.
  • compositions of the present invention In order for the compositions of the present invention to be efficiently formed into solid dosage forms it is generally desirable for the lipophilic microphase-forming materials to have relatively high melting points and relatively high T g values. However, even lipophilic microphase-forming materials that are liquid at room temperature may be formed into solid dosage forms as long as the amount incorporated into the dosage form is not too high.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is either a liquid at room temperature or becomes liquid at a temperature of about 50° C. or less
  • a preferred embodiment is to disperse the lipophilic microphase-forming material in a solid excipient.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed to the surface of a solid material such as microcrystalline cellulose; silica; dibasic calcium phosphate; calcium silicate (ZeodorTM); clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; Na-, Al-, and Fe-montmorillonite; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil® or Aerosil®); magnesium trisilicate; aluminum hydroxide; magnesium hydroxide, magnesium oxide or talc. Highly porous materials such as calcium silicate are preferred.
  • a solid material such as microcrystalline cellulose; silica; dibasic calcium phosphate; calcium silicate (ZeodorTM); clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; Na-, Al-, and Fe-montmorillonite; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil® or Aeros
  • This embodiment has the advantage of separating the lipophilic microphase-forming material from the solid amorphous dispersion, thus minimizing the effect of the lipophilic microphase-forming material on the glass transition temperature of the dispersion. As described in more detail below, it is desired that the dispersion have a high glass transition temperature in order to provide good physical stability.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed in a concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • Such lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersions serve to (1) render the lipophilic microphase-forming material solid to aid in incorporation into solid dosage forms, (2) aid in dispersing of the lipophilic microphase-forming material as a microphase, and (3) provide additional concentration-enhancing polymer for generating and sustaining high concentrations of dissolved drug.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug, in one or more concentration enhancing polymers to form a single dispersion comprising the drug, the one or more concentration-enhancing polymers, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • Such lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersions are often preferred even when the lipophilic microphase-forming material is a solid below about 50° C.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be either hydrophobic, amphiphilic, or a mixture of a hydrophobic and an amphiphilic material.
  • amphiphilic material is meant a material that has both hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions. Since hydrophobic materials alone tend not to form small microphases in an aqueous use environment, amphiphilic and mixtures of amphiphilic and hydrophobic materials are preferred. However, it is known that some such hydrophobic materials will form microphases due to the influence of (1) other excipients such as the concentration-enhancing polymer, (2) the drug itself, or (3) naturally occurring components of the GI tract.
  • hydrophobic materials alone form a part of the invention as long as they form suitably small microphases when the compositions or dosage forms are administered to a use environment.
  • the use of a mixture of hydrophobic and amphiphilic material may be preferred because the hydrophobic material often provides a higher partition coefficient, while the amphiphilic material may limit or reduce the size of the lipophilic microphases in the use environment. Thus, such mixtures may have higher lability and higher partition coefficients.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming materials have a molecular weight of less than about 20,000 daltons. However, most lipophilic microphase-forming materials have molecular weights below about 2,000 daltons. Additionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming materials are water immiscible and form lipophilic microphases. The lipophilic microphase-forming material is therefore distinct from the concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • the concentration-enhancing polymers generally have molecular weights of greater than about 10,000 daltons, are more soluble or dispersible in the use environment, and are generally less hydrophobic.
  • amphiphilic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include: sulfonated hydrocarbons and their salts, such as sodium 1,4-bis(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate, also known as docusate sodium (CROPOL) and sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS); poloxamers, also referred to as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers (PLURONICs, LUTROLs); polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers (CREMOPHOR A, BRIJ); polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters (polysorbates, TWEEN); short-chain glyceryl mono-alkylates (HODAG, IMWITTOR, MYRJ); polyglycolized glycerides (GELUCIREs); mono- and di-alkylate esters of polyols, such as glycerol; nonionic surfactants such as polyoxy
  • Alkylate esters of polyols may be considered amphiphilic or hydrophobic depending on the number of alkylates per molecule and the number of carbons in the alkylate.
  • the polyol is glycerol
  • mono- and di-alkylates are often considered amphiphilic while trialkylates of glycerol are generally considered hydrophobic.
  • some scientists classify even medium chain mono- and di-glycerides as hydrophobic. See for example Patel et al U.S. Pat. No. 6,294,192 (B1), which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference. Regardless of the classification, compositions comprising mono- and di-glycerides are preferred compositions of this invention.
  • Other suitable amphiphilic materials may be found in Patel, U.S. Pat. No. 6,294,192 and are listed as “hydrophobic non-ionic surfactants and hydrophilic ionic surfactants.”
  • amphiphilic materials may not be water immiscible by themselves, but instead are at least somewhat water soluble. Such amphiphilic materials may nevertheless be used in mixtures to form the lipophilic microphase, particularly when used as mixtures with hydrophobic materials.
  • hydrophobic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include: medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and tri-alkylates (CAPMUL MCM, MIGLYOL 810, MYVEROL 18-92, ARLACEL 186, fractionated coconut oil, light vegetable oils); sorbitan esters (ARLACEL 20, ARLACEL 40); long-chain fatty alcohols (stearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cetostearyl alcohol); long-chain fatty-acids (stearic acid); and phospholipids (egg lecithin, soybean lecithin, vegetable lecithin, sodium taurocholic acid, and 1,2-diacyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, such as 1-palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocoline, 1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, 1,2-distearoyl-sn-
  • Neobee® by Stepan Europe, Voreppe, France, Captex by Abitec Corp., and Crodamol by Croda Corp
  • vegetable oils such as soybean, safflower, corn, olive, cottonseed, arachis, sunflowerseed, palm, or rapeseed
  • fatty acid esters of alkyl alcohols such as ethyl oleate and glyceryl monooleate.
  • Other hydrophobic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include those listed in Patel, U.S. Pat. No.
  • hydrophobic surfactants include: fatty alcohols; polyoxyethylene alkylethers; fatty acids; glycerol fatty acid monoesters; glycerol fatty acid diesters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid monoesters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid diesters, lower alcohol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polypropylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene glycerides; lactic acid derivatives of monoglycerides; lactic acid derivatives of diglycerides; propylene glycol diglycerides; sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers; transesterified vegetable oils; sterols; sterol derivatives; sugar esters; sugar ethers;
  • hydrophilic such as those termed herein as “amphiphilic” or in Patel as “hydrophilic surfactants” and the above hydrophobic materials are particularly suitable.
  • the mixtures of hydrophobic surfactants and hydrophilic surfactants disclosed by Patel are suitable and for many compositions, preferred.
  • mixtures that include triglycerides as a hydrophobic component are also suitable.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is selected from the group consisting of polyglycolized glycerides (GELUCIREs); polyethylene (40 or 60) hydrogenated castor oil (available under the trademarks CREMOPHOR® RH40 and RH60 from BASF); polyoxyethylene (35) castor oil (CREMOPHOR® EL); polyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil (Nikkol HCO-60); alpha tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (Vitamin E TPGS); glyceryl PEG 8 caprylate/caprate (available commercially under the registered trademark LABRASOL® from Gattefosse); PEG 32 glyceryl laurate (sold commercially under the registered trademark GELUCIRE 44/14 by Gattefosse); polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters (available commercially under the registered trademark MYRJ from ICI); polyoxyethylene fatty acid ethers (available commercially under the registered trademark BRIJ from ICI); polyoxyethylene-
  • Neobee® by Stepan Europe, Voreppe, France, Captex by Abitec Corp., and Crodamol by Croda Corp
  • vegetable oils such as soybean, safflower, corn, olive, cottonseed, arachis, sunflowerseed, palm, or rapeseed
  • polyoxyethylene alkylethers fatty acids; lower alcohol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polypropylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene glycerides; lactic acid derivatives of monoglycerides; lactic acid derivatives of diglycerides; propylene glycol diglycerides; transesterified vegetable oils; sterols; sterol derivatives; sugar esters; sugar ethers; sucroglycerides; polyoxyethylene vegetable oils; polyoxyethylene hydrogenated vegetable oils; reaction products of polyols and at least one member of the group consisting of fatty acids, glycerides, vegetable oils,
  • Especially preferred lipophilic microphase-forming materials include mixtures of polyethoxylated castor oils and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri-alkylates, (such as mixtures of CREMOPHOR RH40 and CAPMUL MCM), mixtures of polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri-alkylates, (such as mixtures of TWEEN 80 and CAPMUL MCM), mixtures of polyethoxylated castor oils and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri- alkylates, (such as mixtures of CREMOPHOR RH40 and ARLACEL 20), mixtures of sodium taurocholic acid and palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine and other natural or synthetic phosphatidylcholines, and mixtures of polyglycolized glycerides and medium-chain glycerides
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is present in a sufficient amount so that the combination of the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provides concentration enhancement, as described more fully below.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is either present in the composition or co-administered with the solid amorphous dispersion such that the weight ratio of the lipophilic microphase-forming material to drug (hereinafter referred to as the lipophile:drug ratio) ranges from 0.1 to 100 (wt/wt), and more typically from 0.2 to 50.
  • the optimum amount of the lipophilic microphase-forming material depends on the mass of the dose of the drug, the partition coefficient, and the solubility of the drug.
  • the optimum mass of the lipophilic microphase-forming material increases as the mass of the dose increases.
  • the optimum mass of the lipophilic microphase-forming material decreases as the partition coefficient increases and as the solubility increases.
  • the amount of lipophilic microphase forming material present in the composition should not be so high that the concentration of free drug obtained in the use environment is much lower than that obtained when less lipophilic microphase-forming material is combined with the solid amorphous dispersion and is introduced to the use environment.
  • the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material that is added to the composition is greater than the amount such that all of the drug introduced to the use environment is either present as free drug, or is in the lipophilic microphases, then the performance, in terms of improving drug absorption, will be reduced relative to lower levels of the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • compositions may contain less than this “maximum preferred level.” Nonetheless, levels of lipophilic microphase-forming material somewhat above this level may still improve drug absorption relative to the dispersion alone.
  • This maximum preferred level will depend on the free drug concentration ([Drug] free , typically given in mg/ml), the density of the lipophilic microphase-forming material ( ⁇ lipophile , typically given in mg/ml), and the partition coefficient (K p ).
  • the maximum preferred lipophile:drug ratio is given by the following equation:
  • compositions of the present invention may be prepared according to any technique that results in a mixture comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion of the drug, polymer and lipophilic microphase-forming material is formed so that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion itself.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer may be formed and then mixed with the lipophilic microphase-forming material so that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is mixed with but not included within the dispersion.
  • the solid amorphous dispersion of the drug and polymer may be prepared and then co-administered with a lipophilic microphase-forming material to a use environment, so that the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are both present in the use environment.
  • Dispersions of a low-solubility drug and polymer may be made according to any known process which results in at least a “major portion” (meaning at least 60 wt %) of the drug being in the amorphous state. While the drug in its pure state may be crystalline or amorphous, at least a major portion of the drug in the dispersion is amorphous. By “amorphous” is meant simply that the drug is in a non-crystalline state. As used herein, the term “a major portion” of the drug means that at least 60 wt % of the drug in the dispersion is in the amorphous form.
  • the drug in the dispersion may be substantially amorphous, and preferably may be almost completely amorphous.
  • substantially amorphous means that at least 75 wt % of the drug is amorphous and “almost completely amorphous” means that at least 90 wt % of the drug is amorphous.
  • the amount of drug in the dispersion which is amorphous or crystalline may be measured by powder X-ray diffraction, Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) analysis, differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), or any other standard quantitative measurement.
  • the amorphous drug can exist as a pure phase, as a solid solution of drug homogeneously distributed throughout the polymer or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them.
  • the dispersion is preferably “substantially homogeneous” so that the amorphous drug is dispersed as homogeneously as possible throughout the polymer.
  • Dispersions of the present invention that are substantially homogeneous generally have improved concentration-enhancing properties and, in turn improved bioavailability, relative to nonhomogeneous dispersions.
  • substantially homogeneous means that the drug present in relatively pure amorphous domains within the solid dispersion is relatively small, on the order of less than 20%, and preferably less than 10% of the total amount of drug.
  • the dispersion may have some drug-rich domains, it is preferred that the dispersion itself have a single glass transition temperature (T g ) which demonstrates that the dispersion is substantially homogeneous.
  • T g glass transition temperature
  • T g is the characteristic temperature where a glassy material, upon gradual heating, undergoes a relatively rapid (e.g., 10 to 100 seconds) physical change from a glass state to a rubber state.
  • Dispersions with more than one T g indicating at least partial amorphous phase separation, may also function well, particularly when neither amorphous phase is comprised only of amorphous drug, but rather also contains a significant amount of concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material when included in the dispersion, it may exist as a pure lipophilic phase, as a solid solution of the lipophilic microphase-forming material homogeneously distributed throughout the dispersion, or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material be well distributed throughout the dispersion, either as small, preferably less than 1 ⁇ m in diameter, relatively pure domains of lipophilic microphase-forming material, or more preferably, dispersed such that it is at least partially dissolved in the drug and polymer solid amorphous dispersion.
  • the solid amorphous dispersions of the drug and polymer may be made according to any conventional process for forming dispersions.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, such dispersions may also be made according to any conventional process for forming dispersions.
  • Such processes include mechanical, thermal and solvent processes. Exemplary mechanical processes include milling and extrusion; melt processes include high temperature fusion, solvent modified fusion and melt-congeal processes; and solvent processes include non-solvent precipitation, spray coating and spray-drying. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,456,923 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,099 which describe formation of dispersions via extrusion processes; U.S. Pat. No.
  • the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer may be formed via a melt-congeal or melt-extrusion process.
  • a melt-congeal or melt-extrusion process Such processes are particularly suitable when the drug has a relatively low melting point, typically less than about 200° C. and preferably less than about 150° C.
  • a molten mixture comprising the drug and concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally, lipophilic microphase-forming material, is rapidly cooled such that the molten mixture solidifies to form a solid amorphous dispersion.
  • molten mixture is meant that the mixture comprising the drug and concentration-enhancing polymer is about 10° C. or more above the melting point of the lowest melting point component in the composition.
  • the drug may exist in the molten mixture as a pure phase, as a solution of drug homogeneously distributed throughout the molten mixture, or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them.
  • the molten mixture is preferably substantially homogeneous so that the drug is dispersed as homogeneously as possible throughout the molten mixture.
  • the molten excipients, concentration-enhancing polymer, and drug are preferably sufficiently soluble in each other that a substantial portion of the drug disperses in the concentration-enhancing polymer or excipients. It is often preferred that the mixture be heated above the lower of the melting point of the concentration-enhancing polymer, the drug, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material, if present.
  • the processing temperature may vary from 50° C. up to about 200° C. or higher, depending on the melting point of the drug and polymer, which is a function of the polymer grade selected, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material, if present.
  • the processing temperature should not be so high that an unacceptably high level of degradation of the drug or polymer occurs.
  • the molten mixture should be formed under an inert atmosphere to prevent degradation of the drug and/or polymer at the processing temperature. When relatively high temperatures are used, it is often preferable to minimize the time that the mixture is at the elevated temperature to minimize degradation.
  • the molten mixture may also comprise an excipient that will reduce the melting temperature of the composition (either the drug and/or the polymer), allowing processing at lower temperature.
  • excipients When such excipients have low volatility and substantially remain in the mixture upon solidification, they generally can comprise up to 30 wt % of the molten mixture.
  • a plasticizer may be added to the composition to reduce the melting temperature of the polymer.
  • plasticizers include water, triethylcitrate, triacetin, and dibutyl sebacate.
  • Volatile agents that dissolve or swell the polymer such as acetone, water, methanol, and ethyl acetate, may also be added in low quantities to reduce the melting point of the composition.
  • volatile excipients When such volatile excipients are added, at least a portion, up to essentially all of such excipients, may evaporate in the process of or following conversion of the molten mixture to a solid mixture.
  • the processing may be considered to be a combination of solvent processing and melt-congealing or melt-extrusion. Removal of such volatile excipients from the molten mixture can be accomplished by breaking up or atomizing the molten mixture into small droplets and contacting the droplets with a fluid such that the droplets both cool and lose all or part of the volatile excipient.
  • excipients examples include low molecular weight polymers or oligomers, such as polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and poloxamers; fats and oils, including mono-, di-, and triglycerides; natural and synthetic waxes, such as carnauba wax, beeswax, microcrystalline wax, castor wax, and paraffin wax; long-chain alcohols, such as cetyl alcohol and stearyl alcohol; and long-chain fatty acids, such as stearic acid.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may act to reduce the melting temperature of the composition.
  • the excipient added when volatile, it may be removed from the mixture while still molten or following solidification to form the solid amorphous dispersion.
  • any process may be used to form the molten mixture.
  • One method involves melting the concentration-enhancing polymer in a vessel and then adding the drug, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material, to the molten polymer.
  • Another method involves melting the drug, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material, in a vessel and then adding the concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may often be a liquid at room temperature or may have a low melting point relative to the polymer, it is often preferred to use this last method.
  • a solid blend of the drug, concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be added to a vessel and the blend heated to form the molten mixture.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, it may be mixed with the drug and polymer before or after forming the molten mixture. Alternatively, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may first be melted, if it is not already liquid, and the drug and polymer added to the molten lipophilic microphase-forming material to form the molten mixture.
  • the molten mixture may be mixed to ensure the drug is homogeneously distributed throughout the molten mixture.
  • Such mixing may be done using mechanical means, such as overhead mixers, magnetically driven mixers and stir bars, planetary mixers,-and homogenizers.
  • the contents of the vessel can be pumped out of the vessel and through an in-line or static mixer and then returned to the vessel.
  • the amount of shear used to mix the molten mixture should be sufficiently high to ensure uniform distribution of the drug in the molten mixture.
  • the molten mixture can be mixed from a few minutes to several hours, the mixing time being dependent on the viscosity of the mixture and the solubility of the drug and any optional excipients in the concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • An alternative method of preparing the molten mixture is to use two vessels, melting the drug and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material in the first vessel and the concentration-enhancing polymer and optionally, lipophilic microphase-forming material in a second vessel.
  • the two melts are then pumped through an in-line static mixer or extruder to produce the molten mixture that is then rapidly solidified.
  • the molten mixture can be generated using an extruder, such as a single-screw or twin-screw extruder, both well known in the art.
  • an extruder such as a single-screw or twin-screw extruder, both well known in the art.
  • a solid, or semi-solid mixture of the composition is fed to the extruder whereby the combination of heat and shear forces within the extruder produce a uniformly mixed molten mixture, which can then be rapidly solidified to form the solid amorphous dispersion.
  • the solid feed can be prepared using methods well known in the art for obtaining solid mixtures with high content uniformity.
  • the extruder may be equipped with two or more feeders, allowing the drug, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, to be fed to the extruder through one feeder and the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, through the other.
  • Other excipients to reduce the processing temperature as described above may be included in the solid feed, or in the case of liquid excipients, such as water, may be injected into the extruder using methods well-known in the art.
  • the extruder should be designed such that it produces a molten mixture with the drug uniformly distributed throughout the composition.
  • the various zones in the extruder should be heated to appropriate temperatures to obtain the desired extrudate temperature as well as the desired degree of mixing or shear, using procedures well known in the art.
  • the processing temperature may be below the melting temperature of the undispersed drug but greater than the melting point of the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, since the drug will dissolve into the molten polymer, and if present, the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the processing temperature may be above the melting point of the undispersed drug but below the melting point of the undispersed concentration-enhancing polymer since the molten drug will dissolve in the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, or be absorbed into the polymer.
  • the processing temperature may need to be above the melting point of the drug and the polymer.
  • a liquid or low-melting point excipient may be added that promotes melting or the mutual solubility of the concentration-enhancing polymer and the drug.
  • a high amount of mechanical energy may be needed to mix the drug and the polymer to form a dispersion.
  • the lowest processing temperature and an extruder design that imparts the lowest amount of mechanical energy (e.g., shear) that produces a satisfactory dispersion (substantially amorphous and substantially homogeneous) is chosen in order to minimize the exposure of the drug to harsh conditions.
  • the mixture should be rapidly solidified to form the solid amorphous dispersion. Rapid solidification is only necessary when the drug and other materials in the molten mixture are not miscible.
  • Rapid solidified is meant that the molten mixture is solidified sufficiently fast such that substantial phase separation of the drug from the other materials does not occur. Typically, this means that the mixture should be solidified in less than about 10 minutes, preferably less than about 5 minutes, more preferably less than about 1 minute. If the mixture is not rapidly solidified, phase separation can occur, if the materials are not miscible at storage temperatures, resulting in the formation of drug-rich phases.
  • Solidification often takes place primarily by cooling the molten mixture to at least about 10° C. and preferably at least about 30° C. below its melting point.
  • solidification can be additionally promoted by evaporation of all or part of one or more volatile excipients or solvents.
  • the molten mixture is often formed into a high surface area shape such as a rod or fiber or droplets.
  • the molten mixture can be forced through one or more small holes to form long thin fibers or rods or may be fed to a device, such as an atomizer such as a rotating disk, that breaks the molten mixture up into droplets from 1 ⁇ m to 1 cm in diameter.
  • the droplets are then contacted with a relatively cool fluid such as air or nitrogen to promote cooling and evaporation.
  • Another method for forming solid amorphous dispersions is by “solvent processing,” which consists of dissolution of the drug and one or more concentration-enhancing polymers, as well as, optionally, the one or more materials that make up the lipophilic microphase-forming material, in a common solvent.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may also be dissolved or suspended in the solvent.
  • “Common” here means that the solvent, which can be a mixture of compounds, will dissolve the drug and the polymer(s). Although it need not completely dissolve the lipophilic microphase-forming material, it is often preferred to use a solvent in which the lipophilic microphase-forming material is also soluble.
  • the solvent is rapidly removed by evaporation or by mixing with a non-solvent.
  • exemplary processes are spray-drying, spray-coating (pan-coating, fluidized bed coating, etc.), and precipitation by rapid mixing of the polymer and drug solution with CO 2 , water, or some other non-solvent.
  • the solvent may be removed through the process of spray-drying.
  • spray-drying is used conventionally and broadly refers to processes involving breaking up liquid mixtures into small droplets (atomization) and rapidly removing solvent from the mixture in a container (spray-drying apparatus) where there is a strong driving force for evaporation of solvent from the droplets.
  • the strong driving force for solvent evaporation is generally provided by maintaining the partial pressure of solvent in the spray-drying apparatus well below the vapor pressure of the solvent at the temperature of the drying droplets. This is accomplished by either (1) maintaining the pressure in the spray-drying apparatus at a partial vacuum (e.g., 0.01 to 0.50 atm); (2) mixing the liquid droplets with a warm drying gas; or (3) both.
  • a portion of the heat required for evaporation of solvent may be provided by heating the spray solution.
  • Solvents suitable for spray-drying can be any compound in which the drug and polymer are mutually soluble. If the lipophilic microphase-forming material is part of the dispersion, it may be soluble in the solvent or may be suspended in the solvent. Preferably, the solvent is volatile with a boiling point of 150° C. or less. In addition, the solvent should have relatively low toxicity and be removed from the dispersion to a level that is acceptable according to The International Committee on Harmonization (ICH) guidelines. Removal of solvent to this level may require a processing step such as tray-drying subsequent to the spray-drying or spray-coating process.
  • ICH International Committee on Harmonization
  • Preferred solvents include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, iso-propanol, and butanol; ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and methyl iso-butyl ketone; esters such as ethyl acetate and propylacetate; and various other solvents such as acetonitrile, methylene chloride, toluene, and 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Lower volatility solvents such as dimethyl acetamide or dimethylsulfoxide can also be used. Mixtures of solvents, such as 50% methanol and 50% acetone, can also be used, as can mixtures with water as long as the polymer and drug are sufficiently soluble to make the spray-drying process practicable.
  • alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, iso-propanol, and butanol
  • ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl
  • the temperature and flow rate of the drying gas is chosen so that the polymer/drug-solution droplets are dry enough by the time they reach the wall of the apparatus that they are essentially solid, and so that they form a fine powder and do not stick to the apparatus wall.
  • the actual length of time to achieve this level of dryness depends on the size of the droplets. Droplet sizes generally range from 1 ⁇ m to 500 ⁇ m in diameter, with 5 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m being more typical.
  • the large surface-to-volume ratio of the droplets and the large driving force for evaporation of solvent leads to actual drying times of a few seconds or less, and more typically less than 0.1 second.
  • Solidification times should be less than 100 seconds, preferably less than a few seconds, and more preferably less than 1 second.
  • the size of droplets formed during the spray-drying process are typically less than about 200 ⁇ m in diameter.
  • the resultant solid particles thus formed are generally less than about 200 ⁇ m in diameter.
  • the solid powder typically stays in the spray-drying chamber for about 5 to 60 seconds, further evaporating solvent from the solid powder.
  • the final solvent content of the solid dispersion as it exits the dryer should be low, since this reduces the mobility of the drug molecules in the dispersion, thereby improving its stability.
  • the solvent content of the dispersion as it leaves the spray-drying chamber should be less than 10 wt % and preferably less than 2 wt %. In some cases, it may be preferable to spray a solvent or a solution of a polymer or other excipient into the spray-drying chamber to form granules, so long as the dispersion is not adversely affected.
  • Spray-drying processes and spray-drying equipment are described generally in Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, Sixth Edition (R. H. Perry, D. W. Green, J. O. Maloney, eds.) McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1984, pages 20-54 to 20-57. More details on spray-drying processes and equipment are reviewed by Marshall “Atomization and Spray-Drying,” 50 Chem. Eng. Prog. Monogr. Series 2 (1954). Further details of the spray drying procedure are disclosed in commonly owned Provisional U.S. patent applications Ser. Nos. 60/354,080 and 60/353,986, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference (Attorney Docket Nos. PC23195 and PC23203).
  • the amount of polymer relative to the amount of drug present in the solid amorphous dispersion depends on the drug and polymer and may vary widely from a drug-to-polymer weight ratio of from 0.01 to about 4 (e.g., 1 wt % drug to 80 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients in the dispersion). However, in most cases it is preferred that the drug-to-polymer ratio is greater than about 0.05 (4.8 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients) and less than about 2.5 (71 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients). In some embodiments, the addition of the lipophilic microphase-forming material allows for higher drug loadings. Thus, the drug:polymer ratio may be at least 1.
  • the dispersion is usually in the form of small particles.
  • the particles may be less than 500 ⁇ m in diameter, less than 100 ⁇ m in diameter, less than 50 ⁇ m in diameter, or less than 25 ⁇ m in diameter.
  • the resulting dispersion is in the form of such small particles.
  • the dispersion is formed by other methods such by melt-congeal or melt-extrusion processes, the resulting dispersion may be sieved, ground, milled, or otherwise processed to yield a plurality of small particles.
  • the mixture can be prepared by any method that results in a uniform mixture of the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • Mixing processes include physical mixing as well as wet- and dry-granulation and coating processes.
  • the resulting mixture may be a solid composition comprising the dispersion suspended in the lipophilic microphase-forming material, a mixture of separate dispersion particles and lipophilic microphase-forming material particles interspersed with one another, a series of respective layers of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material, or any other mixture of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed to a water insoluble substrate such as dibasic calcium phosphate, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, silicon dioxide calcium silicate; clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil®) or Aerosil®); magnesium trisilicate; aluminum hydroxide; magnesium hydroxide, magnesium oxide or talc.
  • a water insoluble substrate such as dibasic calcium phosphate, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, silicon dioxide calcium silicate; clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil®) or Aerosil®
  • magnesium trisilicate aluminum hydroxide
  • magnesium hydroxide magnesium oxide or talc.
  • the dispersion may be formed by any of the processes described previously for forming the polymer/drug dispersion including melt processes such as extrusion, solvent processes such as spray-drying, as well as conventional wet and dry granulation processes. Following forming the adsorbate dispersion or granule of lipophilic microphase-forming material the dispersion or granule containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material may then be blended with the polymer/drug dispersion.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed onto the solid substrate using any conventional method.
  • the substrate is initially dried to remove water.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is then combined with the substrate.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be combined with the substrate by the use of a planetary mixer, a Z-blade mixer, a rotogranulator or similar equipment.
  • the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material is kept sufficiently low so that the mixture of lipophilic microphase-forming material and solid substrate forms a free-flowing powder.
  • the proportion of lipophilic microphase-forming material to solid substrate preferably is less than about 4:1 (wt:wt) lipophilic microphase-forming material to solid substrate.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be diluted in a solvent such as methanol prior to adsorbing the lipophilic microphase-forming material to the solid substrate.
  • the resulting slurry is dried, for example in a vacuum desiccator, to form a solid material comprising the lipophilic microphase-forming material and substrate. This solid material may then be combined with the solid amorphous dispersion.
  • Mixing methods include convective mixing, shear mixing, or diffusive mixing.
  • Convective mixing involves moving a relatively large mass of material from one part of a powder bed to another, by means of blades or paddles, revolving screw, or an inversion of the powder bed. Shear mixing occurs when slip planes are formed in the material to be mixed.
  • Diffusive mixing involves an exchange of position by single particles.
  • Tumbling mixers e.g., twin-shell
  • Continuous mixing can be used to improve composition uniformity.
  • Continuous mixers include “in-line” mixers and extruders. Extruders may be single screw or twin-screw. Twin-screw extruders may turn in the same or opposite direction.
  • Milling may also be employed to combine the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Milling is the mechanical process of reducing the particle size of solids (comminution). Because in some cases milling may alter crystalline structure and cause chemical changes for some materials, milling conditions are generally chosen which do not alter the physical form of the dispersion in the sense that the drug in the dispersion is no longer amorphous.
  • the most common types of milling equipment are the rotary cutter, the hammer, the roller, and fluid energy mills. Equipment choice depends on the characteristics of the ingredients in the composition (e.g., soft, abrasive, or friable). Wet- or dry-milling techniques can be chosen for several of these processes, also depending on the characteristics of the ingredients (e.g.
  • the milling process may serve simultaneously as a mixing process if the feed materials are heterogeneous.
  • Conventional mixing and milling processes suitable for use in the present invention are discussed more fully in Lachman, et al., The Theory and Practice of Industrial Pharmacy (3d Ed. 1986).
  • the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may also be combined by dry- or wet-granulating processes as long as granulating conditions are chosen such that the dispersion remains a solid amorphous dispersion.
  • the compositions of the present invention may constitute any device or collection of devices that accomplishes the objective of delivering to the use environment both the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the polymer/drug dispersion in lipophilic microphase-forming material or alternatively, a solid amorphous dispersion of polymer, drug and lipophilic microphase-forming material, are incorporated into the same solid dosage form such as a capsule or tablet.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion of polymer, drug and lipophilic microphase-forming material are incorporated into the same solid dosage form such as a capsule or tablet.
  • more than one such capsule or tablet may be dosed.
  • a solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer, together with the lipophilic microphase-forming material may both be delivered “immediately” to the use environment, meaning that both are substantially released from the dosage form in less than about 30 minutes, or one or both of the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may be delivered over a period of 1 to 20 hours in a sustained, delayed or pulsatile fashion.
  • the dosage form may be considered a controlled release dosage form in which the dispersion, the lipophilic microphase-forming material or both the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material are delivered to the use environment over a 1- to 20-hour period.
  • the dosage form may constitute a layered tablet wherein one or more layers comprise the dispersion and one or more other layers comprise the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the dosage form may be a coated tablet wherein the tablet core comprises the dispersion and the coating comprises the lipophilic microphase-forming material or wherein the tablet core comprises the lipophilic microphase-forming material and the coating comprises the dispersion (which may be formed during the coating process).
  • the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material may even be present in different dosage forms such as tablets or beads and may be administered simultaneously or separately as long as both the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are administered in such a way that the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are both present in the use environment.
  • the polymer/drug dispersion may be dissolved or suspended in an aqueous vehicle containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material and the aqueous suspension subsequently dosed to the use environment.
  • compositions of the present invention provide concentration-enhancement in a use environment relative to one or more control compositions.
  • the compositions of the present invention may provide concentration-enhancement relative to a first control composition consisting essentially of the solid amorphous dispersion of the drug and polymer but without any lipophilic microphase forming material present.
  • the lipophilic microphase forming material is either present in the composition or co-administered in a sufficient amount to provide concentration enhancement (as described more fully below) relative to a first control consisting essentially of an equivalent amount of the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer but with no lipophilic microphase forming material present.
  • the first control composition is identical to the composition comprising the solid amorphous dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material except for the absence of the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the compositions of the present invention provide concentration enhancement relative to a second control composition consisting essentially of the same lipophilic microphase-forming material combined with undispersed crystalline drug in an amount equivalent to the amount of drug in the dispersion of the test composition, but with no concentration-enhancing polymer present.
  • the second control composition is identical to the composition of the invention except that (1) the drug is in the form of undispersed crystalline drug rather than dispersed in the concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) there is no concentration-enhancing polymer present.
  • the control composition consists of the crystalline form that is most thermodynamically stable at ambient conditions (25° C. and 50% relative humidity). In cases where no crystalline form of the drug is known, undispersed amorphous drug may be substituted for crystalline drug.
  • compositions of the present invention provide concentration enhancement in a use environment relative to at least one of the two above controls.
  • compositions of the present invention will provide concentration enhancement in a use environment relative to both of the above two controls.
  • compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide concentration-enhancement in either an in vivo or in vitro use environment.
  • the concentration-enhancement may result in either enhanced relative bioavailability and/or a more regular fed/fasted bioavailability ratio (that is, a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio closer to 1).
  • concentration enhancement may be either enhanced drug concentration in highly mobile drug species, reduced precipitate, enhanced maximum drug concentration, or enhanced dissolution area under the concentration versus time curve (AUC).
  • a “use environment” can be either the in vivo environment of the GI tract, subdermal, intranasal, buccal, intrathecal, ocular, intraaurial, subcutaneous spaces, vaginal tract, arterial and venous blood vessels, pulmonary tract or intramuscular tissue of an animal, such as a mammal and particularly a human, or the in vitro environment of a test solution, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • Concentration enhancement may be determined through either in vivo tests or through in vitro dissolution tests.
  • a composition of the present invention meets the concentration enhancement criteria in at least one of the above test environments.
  • the compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide improved relative bioavailability relative to either the first control composition, the second control composition, or preferably both.
  • Relative bioavailability may be tested in vivo in animals or humans using conventional methods for making such a determination.
  • An in vivo test such as a crossover study, may be used to determine whether a test composition provides an enhanced relative bioavailability compared with one or both control compositions. It is to be understood by those skilled in the art that such in vivo tests are conventionally carried out under fasted conditions.
  • test composition of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is dosed to half a group of test subjects and, after an appropriate washout period (e.g., one week) the same subjects are dosed with a control composition.
  • the control composition may be either the first control composition which consists of the amorphous dispersion with no lipophilic microphase-forming material present, or the second control composition, which consists of an equivalent amount of the drug in undispersed crystalline form and an equivalent amount of the lipophilic microphase-forming material but with no concentration-enhancing polymer present.
  • the other half of the group is dosed with the control composition first, followed by the test composition.
  • the relative bioavailability is measured as the concentration in the blood (serum or plasma) versus time area under the curve (AUC) determined for the test group divided by the AUC in the blood provided by the control composition.
  • AUC time area under the curve
  • this test/control ratio is determined for each subject, and then the ratios are averaged over all subjects in the study.
  • In vivo determinations of AUC can be made by plotting the serum or plasma concentration of drug along the ordinate (y-axis) against time along the abscissa (x-axis).
  • a preferred embodiment is one in which the relative bioavailability of the test composition is at least 1.25 relative to either the first control composition or the second control composition. (That is, the AUC in the blood provided by the test composition is at least 1.25-fold the AUC provided by the control composition.)
  • the relative bioavailability may be at least 2.0, and more preferably at least 3.0, relative to either control composition.
  • the determination of AUCs is a well-known procedure and is described, for example, in Welling, “Pharmacokinetics Processes and Mathematics,” ACS Monograph 185 (1986).
  • An even more preferred embodiment of the present invention is one for which the relative bioavailability of the test composition is at least 1.25-fold relative to both the first control composition and the second control composition.
  • the compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide more regular absorption.
  • the compositions provide a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio that is near 1.0.
  • fed/fasted bioavailability ratio is meant the AUC in the blood provided by a composition dosed to a subject in the fed state, divided by the AUC in the blood provided by the same composition dosed to a subject in the fasted state.
  • subject in the fed state is meant a subject who has eaten a Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-recommended standard high fat breakfast within a period of twenty minutes, and then ingested (i.e., swallowed) the test dosage form essentially immediately thereafter.
  • a standard high-fat breakfast consists of, for example, two eggs fried in one tablespoon of butter, two strips of bacon, six ounces of hash brown potatoes, two pieces of toast with two teaspoons of butter and two pats of jelly, and eight ounces of whole milk.
  • This standard high-fat breakfast contains approximately 964 calories, 54% supplied as fat (58 gm) and 12% supplied as protein, calculated using the monograph “Nutritive Value of Foods”, U.S. Department of Agriculture Home and Garden Bulletin Number 72. Additional food can also be consumed within the twenty-minute period and the subject still qualifies as “fed”.
  • a “subject in the fasted state” for purposes of definition is one who has not eaten for at least eight hours, typically overnight, prior to ingestion of the dosage form.
  • a preferred composition of the present invention comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material provides a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio of from 0.5 to 2.0.
  • the compositions provide a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio of from 0.67 to 1.5, and more preferably of from 0.8 to 1.25.
  • the composition of the present invention provides a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio that is closer to 1 than at least one of the first control compositions and the second composition, more preferably both compositions.
  • the concentration-enhancement provided by the compositions of the present invention may be determined in in vitro dissolution tests in an appropriate use environment. It has been determined that enhanced drug concentration in in vitro dissolution tests in PBS solution is a good indicator of in vivo performance and bioavailability.
  • PBS solution an aqueous solution comprising 20 mM sodium phosphate (Na 2 HPO 4 ), 47 mM potassium phosphate (KH 2 PO 4 ), 87 mM NaCl, and 0.2 mM KCl, adjusted to pH 6.5 with NaOH.
  • a composition of the present invention may be dissolution-tested by adding it to PBS solution and agitating to promote dissolution.
  • a composition of the invention is one which meets the criteria set out below when dosed to PBS solution.
  • the compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material following introduction to an aqueous use environment, provide a concentration of “highly mobile” drug that is at least 2-fold the concentration of highly mobile drug provided by either the first control composition or the second control composition.
  • concentration of highly mobile drug provided by the composition is at least 3-fold, more preferably at least 4-fold the concentration of highly mobile drug provided by either the first control composition or the second control composition.
  • Preferred embodiments meet these criteria with both the first control composition and the second control composition.
  • “highly mobile” is meant drug that is present either as free drug or in a lipophilic microphase.
  • Drug that is highly mobile may be quantified using analytical techniques capable of measuring the concentration of drug in solution that is not in the form of polymer/drug assemblies or in precipitate.
  • a nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) technique may be used, since the NMR measurement only yields a well-resolved signal for species that are sufficiently small or mobile that they may rapidly rotate.
  • the NMR signal has been found to be proportional to the amount of highly mobile drug; that is, free drug and any drug that may be present in a mobile, solvated non-aggregated state such as in lipophilic microphases but not drug present in large polymer/drug assemblies.
  • Highly mobile drug may also be quantified through permeation analysis in which the rate of drug transport through a dialysis or other suitable membrane is proportional to the free drug concentration.
  • compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material provide concentration enhancement by reducing the mass of precipitate formed in the use environment relative to the control composition. Reducing the mass of precipitate results in an increase in the amount of drug present in drug forms that are more labile and mobile, resulting in an increase in relative bioavailability.
  • the “precipitate ratio” is defined as the mass of drug present in the precipitate obtained when a first control composition (e.g., the solid amorphous dispersion alone) is administered to an aqueous use environment divided by the mass of drug present in the precipitate obtained when a test composition comprising the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is administered to an equivalent amount of the same use environment.
  • a first control composition e.g., the solid amorphous dispersion alone
  • a test composition comprising the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material
  • compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material, following introduction to an aqueous environment of use, provide a precipitate ratio that is at least 1.25 relative to the first control composition previously described.
  • the composition of the present invention provides a precipitate ratio that is at least 2-fold, more preferably at least 3-fold relative to the control composition.
  • the amount of drug present in precipitate may be determined by any analytical technique that can quantitatively make such a determination. In one method, the amount of drug present in precipitate is determined by subtracting the total dissolved drug concentration from the theoretical concentration of drug if all of the drug added to the test medium had dissolved.
  • total dissolved drug refers to the total amount of drug dissolved in the aqueous solution, and includes drug present in the form of free drug, micelles, lipophilic microphases and polymer/drug assemblies. Specifically, this means that total dissolved drug may be determined by separating out any undissolved drug by centrifugation or filtration and then measuring the amount of drug remaining in the supernatant or filtrate.
  • Total dissolved drug is typically taken as that material that either passes a 0.45 ⁇ m syringe filter or, alternatively, the material that remains in the supernatant following centrifugation.
  • Filtration can be conducted using a 13 mm, 0.45 ⁇ m polyvinylidine difluoride syringe filter sold by Scientific Resources under the trademark TITAN®.
  • Centrifugation is typically carried out in a polypropylene microcentrifuge tube by centrifuging at 13,000 G for 60 seconds. Other similar filtration or centrifugation methods can be employed and useful results obtained. For example, using other types of microfilters may yield values somewhat higher or lower ( ⁇ 10-40%) than that obtained with the filter specified above but will still allow identification of preferred compositions.
  • drug in precipitate may be determined by collecting the solids obtained upon centrifugation or filtration of the aqueous solution, dissolution of the solids in an appropriate solvent, such as methanol, dimethylsulfoxide, or dimethylacetamide, and then analyzing for the drug using any quantitative analytical technique such as HPLC or NMR.
  • an appropriate solvent such as methanol, dimethylsulfoxide, or dimethylacetamide
  • the composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material may provide a Maximum total dissolved Drug Concentration (MDC) that is at least 1.25-fold the MDC of either the first control composition or the second control composition.
  • MDC Maximum total dissolved Drug Concentration
  • the MDC provided by either control composition is 100 ⁇ g/mL
  • a composition comprising a dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provides an MDC of at least 125 ⁇ g/mL.
  • the MDC of drug achieved with the compositions of the present invention are at least 2-fold, and even more preferably at least 3-fold, that of either control composition.
  • the maximum drug concentration may be taken as the maximum concentration achieved within 90 to 180 minutes following administration of the drug.
  • Preferred compositions meet these criteria for both the first control composition and the second control composition.
  • the compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material may provide in an aqueous use environment a total dissolved drug concentration versus time Area Under The Curve (AUC), for any period of at least 90 minutes between the time of introduction into the use environment and about 270 minutes following introduction to the use environment that is at least 1.25-fold that of either the first control composition or the second control composition. More preferably, the AUC achieved with the compositions of the present invention are at least 2-fold and more preferably at least 3-fold that of either control composition. Preferred compositions meet these criteria for both the first control composition and the second control composition.
  • AUC Area Under The Curve
  • compositions provide a surprisingly “synergistic enhancement” in the various concentration and bioavailability criteria described above.
  • the “synergistic enhancement” is determined by comparing the performance of the test composition of solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material to a “third control composition.”
  • the third control composition consists essentially of the undispersed drug alone in its thermodynamically lowest energy state, typically the most stable crystalline form or its amorphous form if a crystalline form is unknown.
  • compositions of solid amorphous dispersions of drug and polymer and lipophilic microphase-forming material exhibit synergistic enhancement by performing better than would be expected by simply adding the enhancement provided by a dispersion with the enhancement provided by the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the relative enhancement of the first control composition is determined with respect to the third control composition. For example, if the first control composition provides an AUC 90 (that is, the AUC obtained during the first 90 minutes following introduction of the composition to a use environment) of 20,000 min* ⁇ g/ml and the third control composition provides an AUC 90 of 1,000 min* ⁇ g/ml, the first control composition has a relative enhancement of 20-fold.
  • the relative enhancement of the second control composition is determined with respect to the third control composition. For example, if the second control composition provides an AUC 90 of 40,000 min* ⁇ g/mi and the third control composition provides an AUC 90 of 1,000 min* ⁇ g/ml, the second control composition has a relative enhancement of 40-fold.
  • compositions of the present invention provide synergistic enhancement when the relative enhancement provided by the test composition compared with the third control composition is greater than the sum of the relative enhancement provided by the first control composition and the relative enhancement provided by second control composition.
  • first control composition provided a relative enhancement of 20-fold
  • second control composition provided a relative enhancement of 40-fold
  • the sum of their relative enhancements would be 60-fold.
  • a test composition provides synergistic enhancement when it provides a relative enhancement of greater than 60-fold compared with the third control composition.
  • the synergistic enhancement may also be determined by comparing the relative bioavailability of the test composition, first control composition, and second control composition relative to the third control composition. Synergistic enhancement would be shown where the relative bioavailability of the test composition is greater than the sum of the relative bioavailability of the first control composition and the relative bioavailability of the second control composition. For example, if the first control composition provides a relative bioavailability of 1.5 with respect to the third control composition, and the second control composition provides a relative bioavailability of 2.0 with respect to the third control composition, the test composition shows synergistic enhancement when it has a relative bioavailability relative to the third control composition greater than 3.5.
  • compositions in which the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug, in the concentration-enhancing polymer are highly preferred.
  • the drug is a “low-solubility drug,” meaning that the drug may be either “substantially water-insoluble,” which means that the drug has a minimum aqueous solubility at physiologically relevant pH (e.g., pH 1-8) of less than 0.01 mg/mL, “sparingly water-soluble,” that is, has an aqueous solubility up to about 1 to 2 mg/mL, or even low to moderate aqueous-solubility, having an aqueous-solubility from about 1 mg/mL to as high as about 20 to 40 mg/mL.
  • physiologically relevant pH e.g., pH 1-8
  • syntheticly water-soluble that is, has an aqueous solubility up to about 1 to 2 mg/mL, or even low to moderate aqueous-solubility, having an aqueous-solubility from about 1 mg/mL to as high as about 20 to 40 mg/mL.
  • the drug has a dose-to-aqueous solubility ratio greater than 10 mL, and more typically greater than 100 mL, where the drug solubility (mg/mL) is the minimum value observed in any physiologically relevant aqueous solution (e.g., those with pH values between 1 and 8) including USP simulated gastric and intestinal buffers, and dose is in mg.
  • the dose-to-aqueous-solubility-ratio may be determined by simply dividing the dose (in mg) by the aqueous solubility (in mg/mL).
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material works particularly well for very low solubility drugs.
  • the invention finds particular utility where the drug has a solubility of less than 100 ⁇ g/ml, and even greater utility where the solubility is less than 10 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the invention finds utility when the drug has a relatively high absorption rate constant.
  • absorption rate constant is meant a constant that describes the rate at which the drug is moved from the site of administration (e.g., the GI tract of an animal) to the extra-cellular compartment of the body.
  • Absorption rate constants are generally described by zero-order or first-order models. See for example, Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20 th Ed (2000).
  • the invention finds particular utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.005 min ⁇ 1 , more utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.01 min ⁇ 1 , and even more utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.03 min ⁇ 1 or higher.
  • Preferred classes of drugs include, but are not limited to, antihypertensives, antianxiety agents, anticlotting agents, anticonvulsants, blood glucose-lowering agents, decongestants, antihistamines, antitussives, antineoplastics, beta blockers, anti-inflammatories, antipsychotic agents, cognitive enhancers, anti-atherosclerotic agents, cholesterol-reducing agents, antiobesity agents, autoimmune disorder agents, anti-impotence agents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, hypnotic agents, anti-Parkinsonism agents, anti-Alzheimer's disease agents, antibiotics, anti-depressants, and antiviral agents, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, and cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors.
  • Each named drug should be understood to include the neutral form of the drug, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, as well as prodrugs.
  • antihypertensives include prazosin, nifedipine, amlodipine besylate, trimazosin and doxazosin; specific examples of a blood glucose-lowering agent are glipizide and chlorpropamide; a specific example of an anti-impotence agent is sildenafil and sildenafil citrate; specific examples of antineoplastics include chlorambucil, lomustine and echinomycin; a specific example of an imidazole-type antineoplastic is tubulazole; a specific example of an anti-hypercholesterolemic is atorvastatin calcium; specific examples of anxiolytics include hydroxyzine hydrochloride and doxepin hydrochloride; specific examples of anti-inflammatory agents include betamethasone, prednisolone, aspirin, piroxicam, valdecoxi
  • the composition also includes a concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • concentration-enhancing is meant a polymer present in a sufficient amount so that the dispersion provides, at a minimum, either improved AUC, maximum drug concentration, or relative bioavailability relative to a control consisting of an equivalent amount of crystalline drug but with no concentration-enhancing polymer. (Concentration enhancement may be evaluated as described above, except that the dispersion would be the test composition and crystalline drug without any polymer present would be the control composition).
  • Concentration-enhancing polymers should be pharmaceutically acceptable, and should have at least some solubility in aqueous solution at physiologically relevant pHs (e.g., 1-8). Almost any neutral or ionizable polymer that has an aqueous-solubility of at least 0.1 mg/mL over at least a portion of the pH range of 1-8 may be suitable.
  • concentration-enhancing polymer be “amphiphilic” in nature, meaning that the polymer has hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions. Amphiphilic polymers are preferred because it is believed that such polymers tend to have relatively strong interactions with the drug and may promote the formation of various types of polymer/drug assemblies in solution.
  • a particularly preferred class of amphiphilic polymers are those that are ionizable, the ionizable portions of such polymers, when ionized, constituting at least a portion of the hydrophilic portions of the polymer.
  • such polymer/drug assemblies may comprise hydrophobic drug clusters surrounded by the concentration-enhancing polymer with the polymer's hydrophobic regions turned inward towards the drug and the hydrophilic regions of the polymer turned outward toward the aqueous environment.
  • the ionized functional groups of the polymer may associate, for example, via ion pairing or hydrogen bonds, with ionic or polar groups of the drug.
  • the hydrophilic regions of the polymer would include the ionized functional groups.
  • the repulsion of the like charges of the ionized groups of such polymers may serve to limit the size of the polymer/drug assemblies to the nanometer or submicron scale.
  • Such drug/concentration-enhancing polymer assemblies in solution may well resemble charged polymeric micellar-like structures.
  • the inventors have observed that such amphiphilic polymers, particularly ionizable cellulosic polymers such as those listed below, have been shown to interact with drug so as to maintain a higher concentration of drug in an aqueous use environment.
  • One class of polymers suitable for use with the present invention comprises non-ionizable (neutral) non-cellulosic polymers.
  • Exemplary polymers include: vinyl polymers and copolymers having at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, alkylacyloxy, and cyclicamido; polyvinyl alcohols that have at least a portion of their repeat units in the unhydrolyzed (vinyl acetate) form; polyvinyl alcohol polyvinyl acetate copolymers; polyvinyl pyrrolidone; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers, also known as poloxamers; and polyethylene polyvinyl alcohol copolymers.
  • a preferred class of neutral non-cellulosic polymers comprises vinyl copolymers of at least one hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat unit and at least one hydrophobic, alkyl- or aryl-containing repeat unit.
  • Such neutral vinyl copolymers are termed “amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers.”
  • Amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers are believed to provide high concentration enhancements due to the amphiphilicity of these copolymers which provide both sufficient hydrophobic groups to interact with the hydrophobic, low-solubility drugs and also sufficient hydrophilic groups to have sufficient aqueous solubility for good dissolution.
  • the copolymeric structure of the amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers also allows their hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity to be adjusted to maximize performance with a specific low-solubility drug.
  • the preferred copolymers have the general structure:
  • a and B represent “hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing” and “hydrophobic” substituents, respectively, and n and m represent the average number of hydrophilic vinyl repeat units and average number of hydrophobic vinyl repeat units respectively per polymer molecule.
  • Copolymers may be block copolymers, random copolymers or they may have structures anywhere between these two extremes.
  • the sum of n and m is generally from about 50 to about 20,000 and therefore the polymers have molecular weights from about 2,500 to about 1,000,000 daltons.
  • hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat units, “A,” may simply be hydroxyl (—OH) or it may be any short-chain, 1 to 6 carbon, alkyl with one or more hydroxyls attached thereto.
  • the hydroxyl-substituted alkyl may be attached to the vinyl backbone via carbon-carbon or ether linkages.
  • exemplary “A” structures include, in addition to hydroxyl itself, hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, hydroxymethoxy, hydroxyethoxy and hydroxypropoxy.
  • the hydrophobic substituent, “B,” may simply be: hydrogen (—H), in which case the hydrophobic repeat unit is ethylene; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via a carbon-carbon bond such as methyl, ethyl or phenyl; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via an ether linkage such as methoxy, ethoxy or phenoxy; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via an ester linkage such as acetate, propionate, butyrate or benzoate.
  • hydrogen —H
  • the hydrophobic repeat unit is ethylene
  • an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via a carbon-carbon bond such as methyl, ethyl or phenyl
  • an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via an ether linkage such as methoxy, ethoxy or phenoxy
  • amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers of the present invention may be synthesized by any conventional method used to prepare substituted vinyl copolymers.
  • Some substituted vinyl copolymers such as polyvinyl alcohol/polyvinyl acetate are well known and commercially available.
  • a particularly convenient subclass of amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers to synthesize are those where the hydrophobic substituent “B” comprises the hydrophilic substituent “A” to which an alkylate or arylate group is attached via an ester linkage to one or more of the hydroxyls of A.
  • Such copolymers may be synthesized by first forming the homopolymer of the hydrophobic vinyl repeat unit having the substituent B, followed by hydrolysis of a portion of the ester groups to convert a portion of the hydrophobic repeat units to hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat units having the substituent A.
  • n the value of n must be sufficiently large relative to the value of m that the resulting copolymer is at least partially water soluble.
  • the value of the ratio, n/m varies depending on the identity of A and B, it is generally at least about 1 and more commonly about 2 or more.
  • the ratio n/m can be as high as 200.
  • percent hydrolysis the fraction (expressed as a percent) of the total repeat units of the copolymer that are in the hydrolyzed or hydroxyl form.
  • vinylbutyrate/vinylalcohol copolymer formed by hydrolysis of a portion of the butyrate groups having a percent hydrolysis of 75% has an n/m ratio of 3.
  • a particularly preferred family of amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers are those where A is hydroxyl and B is acetate. Such copolymers are termed vinylacetate/vinylalcohol copolymers.
  • Some commercial grades are also sometimes referred to simply as polyvinylalcohol. However, the true homopolymer, polyvinylalcohol is not amphiphilic and is almost entirely water insoluble.
  • Preferred vinylacetate/vinylalcohol copolymers are those where H is between about 67% and 99.5%, or n/m has a value between about 2 and 200.
  • the preferred average molecular weight is between about 2500 and 1,000,000 daltons and more preferably between about 3000 and about 100,000 daltons.
  • Another class of polymers suitable for use with the present invention comprises ionizable non-cellulosic polymers.
  • Exemplary polymers include: carboxylic acid-functionalized vinyl polymers, such as the carboxylic acid functionalized polymethacrylates and carboxylic acid functionalized polyacrylates such as the EUDRAGITS manufactured by Rohm Tech Inc., of Maiden, Mass.; amine-functionalized polyacrylates and polymethacrylates; proteins such as gelatin and albumin; and carboxylic acid functionalized starches such as starch glycolate.
  • Non-cellulosic polymers that are amphiphilic are copolymers of a relatively hydrophilic and a relatively hydrophobic monomer. Examples include acrylate and methacrylate copolymers. Exemplary commercial grades of such copolymers include the EUDRAGITS, which are copolymers of methacrylates and acrylates.
  • a preferred class of polymers comprises ionizable and neutral (or non-ionizable) cellulosic polymers with at least one ester- and/or ether-linked substituent in which the polymer has a degree of substitution of at least 0.05 for each substituent.
  • ether-linked substituents are recited prior to “cellulose” as the moiety attached to the ether group; for example, “ethylbenzoic acid cellulose” has ethoxybenzoic acid substituents.
  • ester-linked substituents are recited after “cellulose” as the carboxylate; for example, “cellulose phthalate” has one carboxylic acid of each phthalate moiety ester-linked to the polymer and the other carboxylic acid unreacted.
  • a polymer name such as “cellulose acetate phthalate” (CAP) refers to any of the family of cellulosic polymers that have acetate and phthalate groups attached via ester linkages to a significant fraction of the cellulosic polymer's hydroxyl groups.
  • the degree of substitution of each substituent group can range from 0.05 to 2.9 as long as the other criteria of the polymer are met.
  • “Degree of substitution” refers to the average number of the three hydroxyls per saccharide repeat unit on the cellulose chain that have been substituted. For example, if all of the hydroxyls on the cellulose chain have been phthalate substituted, the phthalate degree of substitution is 3.
  • cellulosic polymers that have additional substituents added in relatively small amounts that do not substantially alter the performance of the polymer.
  • Amphiphilic cellulosics comprise polymers in which the parent cellulosic polymer has been substituted at any or all of the 3 hydroxyl groups present on each saccharide repeat unit with at least one relatively hydrophobic substituent.
  • Hydrophobic substituents may be essentially any substituent that, if substituted to a high enough level or degree of substitution, can render the cellulosic polymer essentially aqueous insoluble.
  • hydrophobic substituents include ether-linked alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.; or ester-linked alkyl groups such as acetate, propionate, butyrate, etc.; and ether- and/or ester-linked aryl groups such as phenyl, benzoate, or phenylate.
  • Hydrophilic regions of the polymer can be either those portions that are relatively unsubstituted, since the unsubstituted hydroxyls are themselves relatively hydrophilic, or those regions that are substituted with hydrophilic substituents.
  • Hydrophilic substituents include ether- or ester-linked nonionizable groups such as the hydroxy alkyl substituents hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, and the alkyl ether groups such as ethoxyethoxy or methoxyethoxy.
  • Particularly preferred hydrophilic substituents are those that are ether- or ester-linked ionizable groups such as carboxylic acids, thiocarboxylic acids, substituted phenoxy groups, amines, phosphates or sulfonates.
  • One class of cellulosic polymers comprises neutral polymers, meaning that the polymers are substantially non-ionizable in aqueous solution.
  • Such polymers contain non-ionizable substituents, which may be either ether-linked or ester-linked.
  • exemplary ether-linked non-ionizable substituents include: alkyl groups, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.; hydroxy alkyl groups such as hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, etc.; and aryl groups such as phenyl.
  • Exemplary ester-linked non-ionizable substituents include: alkyl groups, such as acetate, propionate, butyrate, etc.; and aryl groups such as phenylate.
  • alkyl groups such as acetate, propionate, butyrate, etc.
  • aryl groups such as phenylate.
  • the polymer may need to include a sufficient amount of a hydrophilic substituent so that the polymer has at least some water solubility at any physiologically relevant pH of from 1 to 8.
  • non-ionizable (neutral) cellulosic polymers that may be used as the polymer include: hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate, and hydroxyethyl ethyl cellulose.
  • a preferred set of neutral cellulosic polymers are those that are amphiphilic.
  • Exemplary polymers include hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose and hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate, where cellulosic repeat units that have relatively high numbers of methyl or acetate substituents relative to the unsubstituted hydroxyl or hydroxypropyl substituents constitute hydrophobic regions relative to other repeat units on the polymer.
  • a preferred class of cellulosic polymers comprises polymers that are at least partially ionizable at physiologically relevant pH and include at least one ionizable substituent, which may be either ether-linked or ester-linked.
  • exemplary ether-linked ionizable substituents include: carboxylic acids, such as acetic acid, propionic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, alkoxybenzoic acids such as ethoxybenzoic acid or propoxybenzoic acid, the various isomers of alkoxyphthalic acid such as ethoxyphthalic acid and ethoxyisophthalic acid, the various isomers of alkoxynicotinic acid such as ethoxynicotinic acid, and the various isomers of picolinic acid such as ethoxypicolinic acid, etc.; thiocarboxylic acids, such as thioacetic acid; substituted phenoxy groups, such as hydroxyphenoxy, etc.; amines, such as amino
  • ester linked ionizable substituents include: carboxylic acids, such as succinate, citrate, phthalate, terephthalate, isophthalate, trimellitate, and the various isomers of pyridinedicarboxylic acid, etc.; thiocarboxylic acids, such as thiosuccinate; substituted phenoxy groups, such as amino salicylic acid; amines, such as natural or synthetic amino acids, such as alanine or phenylalanine; phosphates, such as acetyl phosphate; and sulfonates, such as acetyl sulfonate.
  • carboxylic acids such as succinate, citrate, phthalate, terephthalate, isophthalate, trimellitate, and the various isomers of pyridinedicarboxylic acid, etc.
  • thiocarboxylic acids such as thiosuccinate
  • substituted phenoxy groups such as amino salicylic acid
  • amines such as
  • aromatic-substituted polymers to also have the requisite aqueous solubility, it is also desirable that sufficient hydrophilic groups such as hydroxypropyl or carboxylic acid functional groups be attached to the polymer to render the polymer aqueous soluble at least at pH values where any ionizable groups are ionized.
  • the aromatic substituent may itself be ionizable, such as phthalate or trimellitate substituents.
  • Exemplary cellulosic polymers that are at least partially ionized at physiologically relevant pHs include: hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, ethyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose a
  • Exemplary cellulosic polymers that meet the definition of amphiphilic, having hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions include polymers such as cellulose acetate phthalate and cellulose acetate trimellitate where the cellulosic repeat units that have one or more acetate substituents are hydrophobic relative to those that have no acetate substituents or have one or more ionized phthalate or trimellitate substituents.
  • a particularly desirable subset of cellulosic ionizable polymers are those that possess both a carboxylic acid functional aromatic substituent and an alkylate substituent and thus are amphiphilic.
  • Exemplary polymers include cellulose acetate phthalate, methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, ethyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxylpropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate succinate, cellulose propionate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose butyrate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, ethyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate succinate,
  • cellulosic ionizable polymers are those that possess a non-aromatic carboxylate substituent.
  • Exemplary polymers include hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate succinate and carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose.
  • hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate and carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose.
  • the most preferred is hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate.
  • neutralized acidic polymer is meant any acidic polymer for which a significant fraction of the “acidic moieties” or “acidic substituents” have been “neutralized”; that is, exist in their deprotonated form.
  • neutralized acidic cellulosic polymers is meant any cellulosic “acidic polymer” for which a significant fraction of the “acidic moieties” or “acidic substituents” have been “neutralized.”
  • acidic polymer is meant any polymer that possesses a significant number of acidic moieties.
  • acidic moieties include any functional groups that are sufficiently acidic that, in contact with or dissolved in water, can at least partially donate a hydrogen cation to water and thus increase the hydrogen-ion concentration.
  • This definition includes any functional group or “substituent,” as it is termed when the functional group is covalently attached to a polymer, that has a pK a of less than about 10.
  • Exemplary classes of functional groups that are included in the above description include carboxylic acids, thiocarboxylic acids, phosphates, phenolic groups, and sulfonates.
  • Such functional groups may make up the primary structure of the polymer such as for polyacrylic acid, but more generally are covalently attached to the backbone of the parent polymer and thus are termed “substituents.”
  • Neutralized acidic polymers are described in more detail in commonly assigned copending provisional patent application U.S. Ser. No. 60/300,256 entitled “Pharmaceutical Compositions of Drugs and Neutralized Acidic Polymers” filed Jun. 22, 2001, the relevant disclosure of which is incorporated by reference.
  • the glass transition temperature of the dispersion is dependent on the glass transition temperatures of the materials comprising the dispersion. Since one of the primary materials used to form the dispersion is the concentration-enhancing polymer, and since the glass transition temperature of the drug is often relatively low, the concentration-enhancing polymer may be chosen so as to have a relatively high glass transition temperature. Thus, the polymer may have, when equilibrated with humid air having a relative humidity of about 50%, a glass transition temperature of at least 40° C., at least 70° C., or even greater than 100° C.
  • compositions are simply the mixture of (1) the dispersion of drug and the concentration-enhancing polymer, and (2) the lipophilic microphase-forming material
  • excipients may be utilized in order to formulate the composition into tablets, capsules, suppositories, suspensions, powders for suspension, creams, transdermal patches, depots, and the like.
  • the mixture may be added to other dosage form ingredients in essentially any manner that does not substantially alter the drug.
  • the excipients may be either separate from the mixture and/or included within the mixture.
  • pH modifiers such as acids, bases, or buffers may be beneficial, retarding the dissolution of the composition (e.g., acids such as citric acid or succinic acid when the concentration-enhancing polymer is anionic) or, alternatively, enhancing the rate of dissolution of the composition (e.g., bases such as sodium acetate or amines when the polymer is anionic).
  • compositions may also be added as part of the composition itself or added by granulation via wet or mechanical or other means. These materials may comprise up to 90 wt % of the composition.
  • matrix materials examples include lactose, mannitol, xylitol, microcrystalline cellulose, dibasic calcium phosphate (dihydrate and anhydrous), and starch.
  • disintegrants include sodium starch glycolate, sodium alginate, carboxy methyl cellulose sodium, methyl cellulose, and croscarmellose sodium, and crosslinked forms of polyvinyl pyrrolidone such as those sold under the trade name CROSPOVIDONE (available from BASF Corporation).
  • binders include methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, starch, and gums such as guar gum, and tragacanth.
  • Examples of lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, and stearic acid.
  • preservatives examples include sulfites (an antioxidant), benzalkonium chloride, methyl paraben, propyl paraben, benzyl alcohol and sodium benzoate.
  • suspending agents or thickeners examples include xanthan gum, starch, guar gum, sodium alginate, carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, polyacrylic acid, silica gel, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, and titanium dioxide.
  • anticaking agents or fillers examples include silicon oxide and lactose.
  • solubilizers include ethanol, propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol.
  • compositions of this invention may be employed in the compositions of this invention, including those excipients well-known in the art. Generally, excipients such as pigments, lubricants, flavorants, and so forth may be used for customary purposes and in typical amounts without adversely affecting the properties of the compositions. These excipients may be utilized in order to formulate the composition into tablets, capsules, suspensions, powders for suspension, creams, transdermal patches, and the like.
  • solid dosage forms such as immediate release tablets, controlled release tablets, delayed release tablets, chewable tablets and analogous capsules containing solid material are a preferred embodiment of this invention.
  • Preferred dosage forms of this type generally comprise from 10 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material up to 80 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material as well as the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer, together with other optional excipients.
  • lipophilic microphase-forming material are typically either low melting point or low T g solids, or even liquids at room temperature, that they are not considered appropriate additives for such solid dosage forms except at low levels, typically less than about 5 wt % or less to promote wetting and dissolution of the tablet.
  • solid dosage forms with excellent properties can be made that have relatively high levels of lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • adsorption substrates include materials such as silicon oxide, dibasic calcium phosphate, microcrystalline cellulose, and calcium silicate.
  • Appropriate water soluble or water dispersible dispersion matrix materials include sugars such as sucrose and xylitol, organic acids such as citric acid or lactic acid, water soluble polymers such as polydextrose, polyethylene oxide, or dextrin.
  • Particularly preferred dispersion matrix materials are the concentration-enhancing polymers previously described.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed along with drug in the concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • compositions of the present invention may be delivered by a wide variety of routes, including, but not limited to, oral, nasal, rectal, vaginal, subcutaneous, intravenous, and pulmonary. Generally, the oral route is preferred.
  • compositions of this invention may also be used in a wide variety of dosage forms for administration of drugs.
  • Exemplary dosage forms are powders or granules that may be taken orally either dry or reconstituted by addition of water or other liquids to form a paste, slurry, suspension or solution; tablets; capsules; multiparticulates; and pills.
  • Various additives may be mixed, ground, or granulated with the compositions of this invention to form a material suitable for the above dosage forms.
  • the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer is formulated as a dry powder and then, prior to administration, is dispersed in a vehicle that contains the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated in various forms such that they are delivered as a suspension of particles in a liquid vehicle.
  • suspensions may be formulated as a liquid or paste at the time of manufacture, or they may be formulated as a dry powder with a liquid, typically water, added at a later time but prior to oral administration.
  • Such powders that are constituted into a suspension are often termed sachets or oral powder for constitution (OPC) formulations.
  • Such dosage forms can be formulated and reconstituted via any known procedure. The simplest approach is to formulate the dosage form as a dry powder that is reconstituted by simply adding water and agitating.
  • the dosage form may be formulated as a liquid and a dry powder that are combined and agitated to form the oral suspension.
  • the dosage form can be formulated as two powders which are reconstituted by first adding water to one powder to form a solution to which the second powder is combined with agitation to form the suspension.
  • the dispersion of drug be formulated for long-term storage in the dry state as this promotes the chemical and physical stability of the drug.
  • Yet another method to deliver the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is to co-administer the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material to an in vivo use environment.
  • the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may each be added separately to the in vivo use environment.
  • the dispersion may be taken orally prior to the lipophilic microphase-forming material, at the same time, or after the lipophilic microphase-forming material has been taken orally.
  • the solid amorphous dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material should be administered within 15 minutes of each other.
  • the present invention has an aspect that relates to the treatment of a condition or disorder by treatment with a combination of a polymer/drug solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material which may be co-administered separately, the invention also relates to combining separate pharmaceutical compositions in kit form.
  • the kit comprises two separate pharmaceutical compositions: (1) a composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer; and (2) a composition comprising a lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the amounts of (1) and (2) are such that, when co-administered separately, the condition or disorder is treated and/or remediated.
  • the kit comprises a container for containing the separate compositions such as a divided bottle or a divided foil packet, wherein each compartment contains a plurality of dosage forms (e.g., tablets) comprising (1) or (2).
  • the kit may contain separate compartments each of which contains a whole dosage which in turn comprises separate dosage forms.
  • An example of this type of kit is a blister pack wherein each individual blister contains two (or more) tablets, one (or more) tablet(s) comprising pharmaceutical composition (1), and the second (or more) tablet(s) comprising pharmaceutical composition (2).
  • the kit comprises directions for the administration of the separate components.
  • kit form is particularly advantageous when the separate components are preferably administered in different dosage forms (e.g., oral and parenteral), are administered at different dosage intervals, or when titration of the individual components of the combination is desired by the prescribing physician.
  • a kit therefore comprises
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion of a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer, in a first dosage form;
  • Blister packs are well known in the packaging industry and are widely used for the packaging of pharmaceutical unit dosage forms such as tablets, capsules, and the like. Blister packs generally consist of a sheet of relatively stiff material covered with a foil of a preferably transparent plastic material. During the packaging process recesses are formed in the plastic foil. The recesses have the size and shape of the tablets or capsules to be packed. Next, the tablets or capsules are placed in the recesses and the sheet of relatively stiff material is sealed against the plastic foil at the face of the foil which is opposite from the direction in which the recesses were formed.
  • the tablets or capsules are sealed in the recesses between the plastic foil and the sheet.
  • the strength of the sheet is such that the tablets or capsules can be removed from the blister pack by manually applying pressure on the recesses whereby an opening is formed in the sheet at the place of the recess. Tablet(s) or capsule(s) can then be removed via said opening.
  • a memory aid on the kit, e.g., in the form of numbers next to the tablets or capsules whereby the numbers correspond with the days of the regimen during which the tablets or capsules so specified should be ingested.
  • a memory aid is a calendar printed on the card, e.g., as follows “First Week, Monday, Tuesday, . . . etc. . . . Second Week, Monday, Tuesday, . . . ”, etc.
  • a “daily dose” can be a single tablet or capsule or several pills or capsules to be taken on a given day.
  • a daily dose of the first compound can consist of one tablet or capsule while a daily dose of the second compound can consist of several tablets or capsules and vice versa.
  • the memory aid should reflect this.
  • compositions of the present invention may be used to treat any condition which is subject to treatment by administering a drug.
  • Solid amorphous dispersions of drugs and various concentration-enhancing polymers were prepared by spray-drying each solution of drug and polymer, using either a Niro PSD-1 spray drier or a “mini” spray drier.
  • the drug was [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-1-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (“Drug 1”).
  • the drug was the hydrochloride salt form of ziprazidone (“Drug 2A”), while for Dispersion 5, the drug was the free base form of ziprazidone (“Drug 2B”).
  • the drug was 2-phenanthrenecarboxamide, 4b,5,6,7,8,8a,9,10-octahydro-7-hydroxy-N-[(2-methyl-3-pyridinyl)methyl]-4b-(phenylmethyl)-7-(3,3,3-trifluoropropyl)-, (4bS,7S,8aR) (“Drug 3”).
  • the drug was 5-chloro-1H-indole-2-carboxylic acid [(1S)-benzyl -3-((3R, 4S)-dihydroxypyrroldin-1-yl-)-(2R)-hydroxy-3-oxypropyl] amide (“Drug 4”).
  • Dispersion 1 an amorphous dispersion of Drug 1 and HPMCAS-MF was prepared using a Niro PSD-1 spray drier.
  • a spray solution was formed containing 2.5 wt % Drug 1, 7.5 wt % HPMCAS-MF, and 90% acetone.
  • the solution was spray-dried by directing a Niro two-fluid external-mix spray nozzle at 2.7 bar with a feed rate of 190 g/min into the stainless-steel chamber of a Niro PSD-1 spray-dryer, using nitrogen as the drying gas, maintained at a temperature of 137° C. at the inlet; the drying gas and evaporated solvent exited the drier at 49° C.
  • Dispersion 1 contained 25 wt % Drug 1.
  • the mean diameter of the dispersion particles was 15 ⁇ m.
  • Dispersions 2, 3, 8, 10, and 12 were prepared using the same process as described for Dispersion 1, with the exception of the variables noted in Table 1, which summarizes the process conditions.
  • Dispersion 12 was spray-dried using a Niro PSD-4 spray drier and a pressure nozzle (Delvan SDX111 (SA-38)).
  • SA-38 pressure nozzle
  • Dispersion 4 an amorphous dispersion of ziprazidone, in the hydrochloride salt form, (“Drug 2A”), was prepared using the mini spray drier.
  • the spray solution consisted of 0.14 wt % Drug 2A, 0.14 wt % HPMCAS-HF, and 99.72 wt % methanol.
  • the solution was pumped into a “mini” spray-drying apparatus via a Cole Parmer 74900 series, rate-controlling syringe pump at a rate of 1.3 mL/min.
  • the drug/polymer solution was atomized through a Spraying Systems Co. two-fluid nozzle, Module No. SU1A using a heated stream of nitrogen (100° C.).
  • Dispersion 4 contained 50 wt % Drug 2 form A.
  • Dispersions 5, 6, 7, 9 and 11 were prepared using the same process as described for Dispersion 4, with the exception of the variables noted in Table 2, which summarizes the process conditions. Note that for Dispersion 11 the lipophilic microphase-forming material (Capmul MCM) was included in the solvent solution used to form the dispersion. TABLE 2 Drug Polymer Solvent Feed Disp. Drug Mass Mass Mass Rate T in No. No.
  • Table 3 summarizes the various dispersions used in the Examples which follow. TABLE 3 Drug Conc. Spray-drier Used Dispersion Drug in Dispersion to Prepare No. No. (active, wt %) Polymer Dispersion 1 1 25 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1 2 1 25 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1 3 2A 10 HPMCAS-HF Niro PSD-1 4 2A 50 HPMCAS-HF Mini 5 2B 50 HPMCAS-HF Mini 6 3 10 CAP Mini 7 3 10 HPMCAS-MF Mini 8 4 50 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1 9 1 10 HPMC Mini 10 1 35 CMEC Niro PSD-1 11 1 20 HPMCAS-MF Mini 12 1 25 HPMCAS-MG Niro PSD-1
  • a method is used to screen a candidate lipophilic microphase-forming material for suitability in providing concentration-enhancement.
  • a simulated intestinal buffer solution was prepared by dissolving 6.8 g of potassium phosphate monobasic in 750 mL of deionized water with 85 mL 0.2 M sodium hydroxide. Water was added for a final volume of 1 L. The pH was adjusted to 6.8 ⁇ 0.1 using 0.2 M sodium hydroxide.
  • a lipophilic microphase-forming material was added to the buffer solution.
  • 0.069 wt % polyethoxylated castor oil (CREMOPHOR RH40) and 0.031 wt % glyceryl mono- and di-caprylate (CAPMUL MCM) were added to the buffer to form the lipophilic microphase.
  • 250 mL of the resulting solution was then added to a vessel in a VanKel dissolution testing apparatus with automatic sampling. The solution temperature was maintained at 37° C., and stirred with a paddle speed of 50 rpm.
  • Control 1 consisted of dissolution of Dispersion 1 in intestinal buffer without the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • TABLE 4 Drug 1 Example Time Concentration AUC No. Dispersion (min) ( ⁇ g/mL) (min* ⁇ g/mL) 1 1 0 0 0 5 42 100 15 75 700 20 85 1,100 35 86 2,400 45 87 3,200 60 84 4,500 75 85 5,800 90 81 7,000 120 78 9,400 180 74 14,000 1200 68 86,100 Control 1 1 0 0 0 5 13 0 15 21 200 20 29 300 35 39 800 45 43 1,300 60 45 1,900 75 55 2,700 90 59 3,500 120 64 5,400 180 59 9,000 1200 40 59,400
  • the test performed with the lipophilic microphase-forming material provided a C max180 that was 1.4-fold that of the control, and an AUC 180 that was 1.6-fold that of the control, indicating that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is suitable for use in the invention.
  • Example 2 demonstrates that the lipophilic microphase forming material results in a significant amount of drug being present in lipophilic microphases and decreases the amount of drug present as precipitate.
  • 4.0 mg of Dispersion 2 was added to Eppendorf tubes (in duplicate) containing 1.0 mL of deuterated PBS with the following lipophilic microphase-forming material: 1.09 mg Cremophore RH40 and 0.50 mg Capmul MCM.
  • the solution also contained 0.11 mg 3-(trimethylsilyl)propionic-2,2,3,3- d 4 acid, sodium salt (“TSP”; a deuterated NMR reference standard).
  • TSP 3-(trimethylsilyl)propionic-2,2,3,3- d 4 acid, sodium salt
  • the precipitate was analyzed by centrifuging the solution and decanting the supernatant. The pellet was dried, then dissolved in DMSO and analyzed by NMR. The proton spectra was used to measure the polymer:drug ratio, and the concentration of drug in the precipitate was calculated from standards.
  • HPLC was used to determine the amount of total dissolved drug in the supernatant following centrifugation.
  • the drug observed by HPLC consisted of free drug in solution, drug present in polymer/drug assemblies, and drug in the lipophilic microphase.
  • Control 2 consisted of Dispersion 2 in deuterated PBS without the lipophilic microphase. TABLE 6 Drug in Highly Polymer/ Lipophile/ Drug in Mobile Drug Exp. Lipophilic Drug Precipitate Drug Assemblies No. Dispersion Drug Microphase Ratio ( ⁇ g/mL) ( ⁇ g/mL) ( ⁇ g/mL) 2 2 1 Cremophor 1.59 50 400 550 & Capmul Control 2 1 none — 270 ⁇ 3 730 2
  • composition of the present invention provided concentration enhancement over the control.
  • concentration of drug that is highly mobile, meaning either present as free drug or present in lipophilic microphases, for Example 2 was at least 133-fold that provided by Control 2.
  • precipitate ratio was 5.4 (270/50).
  • Example 3 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with a mixture of sodium taurocholic acid and 1-palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (“NaTC/POPC”; 4/1 wt/wt).
  • Example 4 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Tween 80 and Capmul MCM (40/60 wt/wt).
  • Example 5 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Capmul MCM (40/60 wt/wt).
  • Example 6 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Capmul MCM (72/28 wt/wt).
  • Example 7 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Arlacel 20 (75/25 wt/wt).
  • Example 8 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS).
  • Example 3 For Example 3, to analyze the concentration of Drug 1 that was highly mobile using NMR, 18 mg of Dispersion 2 was added to 1.8 mLs of deuterated PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC, and the reference standards TSP and 19 F TFA. For Examples 4 through 8, 0.1 wt % of additional lipophilic microphase-forming materials were added. The results are shown in Table 7. Control 2 (Dispersion 2 in deuterated PBS without the lipophilic microphase) is shown again for comparison. TABLE 7 Highly Lipophile/ Mobile Ex. Drug Drug No.
  • Dispersion Drug Lipophilic Microphase Ratio ( ⁇ g/mL) 3 2 1 NaTC/POPC 2.0 13.0 4 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 24.9 Tween 80 & Capmul 5 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 32.9 Cremophor & Capmul (40/60) 6 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 86.7 Cremophor & Capmul (72/28) 7 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 78.4 Cremophor & Arlacel 8 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 22.8 SLS Control 2 1 none — ⁇ 1 2
  • Dispersion 1 was co-administered to PBS containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material TWEEN 80 (Example 9), Capmul MCM (Example 10), Cremophor RH40 (Example 11), or a 69/31 (wt/wt) mixture of Cremophor RH40/Capmul MCM (Example 12).
  • Dispersion 1 was added to 250 mLs of PBS containing 0.5 wt % of the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Dissolution tests were performed as described for Example 1. Results are shown in Table 8. TABLE 8 Drug 1 Example Time Concentration AUC No.
  • Examples 9 through 12 provided C max180 from 1.5-fold to 2.0-fold that of the control, and AUC 180 from 1.5-fold to 2.1-fold that of the control.
  • Dispersion 3 3.6 mg of Dispersion 3, 0.78 mg of Dispersion 4, or 0.72 mg of Dispersion 5, was added to microcentrifuge tubes in duplicate. A sufficient amount of each dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 200 ⁇ g/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved.
  • the tubes were placed in a 37° C. temperature-controlled chamber, and 1.8 mL PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC was added to each respective tube. The samples were quickly mixed using a vortex mixer for about 60 seconds. The samples were centrifuged at 13,000 G at 37° C. for 1 minute.
  • the resulting supernatant solution was then sampled and diluted 1:6 (by volume) with water/methanol (1 ⁇ 4) and then analyzed by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Phenomenex ODS 20 column.
  • the mobile phase consisted of 0.02 M KH 2 PO 4 , pH 3.0/acetonitrile in the ratio of 60/40 vol/vol.
  • Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 254 nm to the absorbance of Drug 2A or 2B standards.
  • the contents of each respective tube were mixed on the vortex mixer and allowed to stand undisturbed at 37° C. until the next sample was taken. Samples were collected at 4, 10, 20, 40, 90, and 1200 minutes. The results are shown in Table 10.
  • Controls 3 through 5 consisted of Dispersions 3 through 5, respectively, in PBS without the lipophilic microphase.
  • TABLE 10 Drug 2 Example Time Concentration AUC No. Dispersion (min) ( ⁇ g/mL) (min* ⁇ g/mL) 13 3 0 0 0 4 173 300 10 168 1,400 20 133 2,900 40 108 5,300 90 59 9,500 1200 249 180,200 14 4 0 0 0 4 12 0 10 24 100 20 43 500 40 47 1,400 90 25 3,200 1200 15 25,800 15 5 0 0 4 74 100 10 42 500 20 37 900 40 21 1,500 90 16 2,400 1200 13 18,500 Control 3 3 0 0 0 4 23 100 10 21 200 20 24 400 40 20 900 90 8 1,600 1200 8 10,900 Control 4 4 0 0 0 4 10 0 10 13 100 20 16 200 40 13 500 90 9 1,100 1200 4 8,000 Control 5 5 0 0 0 4 27 100 10 23 200 20 18 400 40 13 700 90 7 1,200
  • Examples 3, 4, and 5 provided C max90 were 7.2-, 2.9-, and 2.7-fold that provided by each respective control.
  • Examples 3, 4, and 5 provided AUC 90 values that were 5.9-, 2.9-, and 2.0-fold that provided by each respective control.
  • Examples 16 through 19 evaluate several lipophilic microphase-forming materials with dispersions containing different drugs and different polymers. Examples 16 through 19 consisted of Dispersions 6 through 9 in solutions with NaTC/POPC or Tween 80 as the lipophilic microphase material. Table 3 shows the compositions of Dispersions 6 through 9.
  • Dispersion 6 or Dispersion 7 was added to PBS containing 2 wt % Tween 80 (the Drug 3 concentration would have been 200 ⁇ g/mL if all of the drug dissolved).
  • 3.6 mg of Dispersion 8 was added to PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC (the Drug 4 concentration would have been 1000 ⁇ g/mL if all of the drug dissolved).
  • 1.8 mg of Dispersion 9 was added to PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC (the Drug 1 concentration would have been 100 ⁇ g/mL if all of the drug dissolved). Dissolution tests were performed as described above for Examples 13 through 15.
  • Drug 3 was analyzed by HPLC using a Waters Symmetry C 18 column.
  • the mobile phase consisted of 0.02 M KH 2 PO 4 , pH 3.0/acetonitrile in the ratio of 60/40 vol/vol.
  • Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 208 nm to the absorbance of Drug 3 standards.
  • Drug 4 was analyzed by HPLC using a Zorbax SB C 18 column.
  • the mobile phase consisted of water/methanol in the ratio of 35/65 vol/vol.
  • Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 297 nm to the absorbance of Drug 4 standards.
  • Drug 1 was analyzed by HPLC as described above for Example 1. Drug concentrations versus time are shown in Table 12.
  • Controls 6 through 9 consisted of Dispersions 6 through 9, respectively, in PBS without the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • the Examples showed an improvement in C max90 from 1.3- to 2.5-fold that of each respective control.
  • the Examples showed an improvement in AUC 90 from 1.5- to 3.4-fold that of each respective control.
  • Partition coefficients were measured for Drug 1 in PBS with the lipophilic microphase-forming materials Capmul MCM, a 2.2:1 (wt:wt) mixture of Cremophore RH40/Capmul MCM, Pluronic F127, TWEEN 80, sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS), PEG 6000 distearate, MYRJ 59, Cremophore A25, and NaTC/POPC, using the following method.
  • highly mobile Drug 1 concentration was measured for solutions of crystalline Drug 1 and varying concentrations of the lipophilic microphase material, or with Dispersion 2 (25 wt % Drug 1 with HPMCAS-MF). The concentration of Drug 1 versus concentration of lipophilic microphase material was graphed, and the slope was used to determine the partition coefficient of Drug 1 in the lipophilic microphase material from the equation
  • [Drug] lipophile [Drug] free ⁇ K p ⁇ X lipophile .
  • Dispersion 11 The concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 11, comprising 20 wt % Drug 1, 20 wt % Capmul MCM, and 60 wt % HPMCAS-MF, was determined using NMR analysis as follows. A 9.0 mg sample of Dispersion was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and 19 F TFA, as described in Example 2. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 11 as determined by NMR is shown in Table 17. For comparison, the results for Control 2 (Dispersion 2 comprising 25 wt % Drug 1 and 75 wt % HPMCAS-MF) is included in the table.
  • the concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 2, comprising 25 wt % Drug 1 and 75 wt % HPMCAS when co-administered with various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined as follows. A 7.2 mg sample of Dispersion 2 was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and 19 F TFA to which had been added 1.8 mg of the lipophilic microphase-forming materials shown in Table 18. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 2 co-administered with these lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined by NMR using the procedures outlined in Example 2. The results are presented in Table 18, as is the result for Control 2.
  • Dispersion 10 The concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 10, comprising 35 wt % Drug 1 and 65 wt % CMEC when co-administered with various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined as follows. A 5.1 mg sample of Dispersion 10 was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and 19 F TFA to which had been added 1.8 mg of the lipophilic microphase-forming materials shown in Table 19. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 10 co-administered with these lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined by NMR using the procedures outlined in Example 2.
  • This example demonstrates a lipophilic microphase-forming material adsorbed to a solid substrate.
  • the lipophilic microphase-forming material was adsorbed to a solid substrate as follows. First, a quantity of calcium silicate (Zeopharm® 600, available from JM Huber Corporation) was dried in a vacuum oven at a temperature of about 100° C. for 5 hours. Next a 69:31 (wt/wt) mixture of Cremophore RH 40:Capmul MCM was prepared. The materials were warmed sufficiently to become liquid, and 6.9 g of Cremophore RH 40 and 3.1 g of Capmul MCM was added to a vial. The mixture was warmed to 37° C. with constant stirring. The mixture was diluted by adding 10 g of methanol (1:1 mass ratio).
  • the resulting solution was agitated and then stirred at room temperature.
  • 1.1952 g of the Cremophore RH 40:Capmul MCM solution and 0.2015 g of calcium silicate were next added to a vial.
  • the materials were mixed to form a slurry and then allowed to dry in a fume hood at room temperature overnight.
  • the vials were then placed in a vacuum desiccator and allowed to dry for about five hours to remove residual methanol.
  • the resulting material was a dry, freely flowing powder having a weight ratio of lipophilic microphase forming material to solid substrate of about 3/1.
  • compositions comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic-microphase forming material adsorbed onto a solid substrate were dissolution tested to determine whether the composition provided concentration-enhancement.
  • Example 30 For Example 30, 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 was added to microcentrifuge tubes.
  • Example 31 For Example 31, 3.6 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 was added to microcentrifuge tubes.
  • Example 30 For Example 30, a sufficient amount of dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 980 ⁇ g/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved.
  • Example 31 a sufficient amount of dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 490 ⁇ g/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved.
  • the tubes were placed in a 37° C. temperature-controlled chamber, and 1.8 mL MFDS was added to each respective tube. The,samples were quickly mixed using a vortex mixer for about 90 seconds. The samples were centrifuged at 13,000 G at 37° C. for 2 minutes.
  • Control 10 consisted of 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 but no lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • Control 11 consisted of 3.6 mg of Dispersion 12 but no lipophilic microphase-forming material.
  • Control 12 consisted of 1.8 mg of crystalline Drug 1 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29.
  • Control 13 consisted of 0.9 mg of crystalline Drug 1 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29. TABLE 20 Drug 1 Time Concentration AUC Example No. Dispersion (min) ( ⁇ g/mL) (min* ⁇ g/mL) 30 12 0 0 0 4 850 1,710 10 817 6,710 20 775 14,600 40 741 29,700 90 731 66,500 31 12 0 0 0 4 407 821 10 392 3,220 20 377 7,070 40 362 14,500 90 357 32,800 Control 10 12 0 0 0 4 189 364 10 432 2,200 20 726 7,960 40 769 23,000 90 681 59,800 Control 11 12 0 0 0 4 92 194 10 227 1,170 20 354 4,080 40 369 11,300 90 307 28,200 Control 12 none 0 0 0 4 5 11 10 5 37 20 5 83 40 5 182 90 6 453 Control 13 none 0 0 0 4 3
  • Example 30 provided a C max 90 that was 1.1-fold and 142-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively.
  • Example 31 provided a C max90 that was 1.1- and 102-fold that provided by Controls 11 and 13, respectively.
  • Example 30 provided an AUC 90 that was 1.1- and 148-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively.
  • Example 31 provided an AUC 90 that was 1.1- and 98-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively.
  • a combination of a solid amorphous dispersion and adsorbed lipophilic-microphase forming material was dosed to aqueous solution and analyzed by NMR using the procedure of Example 2 to determine the amount of highly mobile drug that was present in aqueous solution, compared with dosing a dispersion alone.
  • Example 32 For Example 32, 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 were added to 1.8 ml of partially deuterated PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC and a TFA standard (0.0013M 19 F). Samples were held at 37° C. and vortexed for one minute and then transferred to an 8 mm NMR tube. The concentration of drug was determined through integration of drug peaks and comparison with the TFA peaks.
  • Control 14 was the same as Example 32 but contained no adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Dispersion Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)

Abstract

A pharmaceutical composition comprises a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and a lipophilic microphase-forming material. Alternatively, a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer is co-administered with a lipophilic microphase-forming material to an in vivo use environment.

Description

  • The priority of Provisional Application Serial No. 60/354,081 filed Feb. 1, 2002 is claimed.[0001]
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material that enhances the concentration of the drug in a use environment. [0002]
  • Low-solubility drugs often show poor bioavailability or irregular absorption, the degree of irregularity being affected by factors such as dose level, fed state of the patient, and form of the drug. Increasing the bioavailability of low-solubility drugs has been the subject of much research. Increasing bioavailability depends on improving the concentration of dissolved drug in solution to improve absorption. [0003]
  • It is well known that the amorphous form of a low-solubility drug that is capable of existing in either the crystalline or amorphous form may temporarily provide a greater aqueous concentration of drug relative to the equilibrium concentration obtained by dissolution of the drug in a use environment. Such amorphous forms may consist of the amorphous drug alone, a dispersion of the drug in a matrix material, or the drug adsorbed onto a substrate. It is believed that such amorphous forms of the drug may dissolve more rapidly than the crystalline form, often dissolving faster than the drug can precipitate from solution. As a result, the amorphous form may temporarily provide a greater-than equilibrium concentration of drug. [0004]
  • While such amorphous forms may show initially enhanced concentration of the drug in a use environment, nevertheless the improved concentration is often short-lived. Typically, the initially enhanced drug concentration is only temporary and quickly returns to the lower equilibrium concentration. [0005]
  • One approach to increase the bioavailability of low-solubility drugs has involved forming amorphous dispersions of drugs with polymers. Examples of attempts to increase drug concentration by forming a dispersion of the drug with a polymer include Nakamichi et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,456,923, and Curatolo et al., EP 0901786A2. [0006]
  • It is known to mix surfactants with solid amorphous dispersions. Curatolo et al., EP 0901786A2 disclose that a component of the dispersion may be a surface-active agent such as a fatty acid and alkyl sulfonate, commercial surfactants such as benzethanium chloride, docusate sodium, and polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, and natural surfactants. Curatolo et al. state that such materials can advantageously be employed to increase the rate of dissolution by facilitating wetting, thereby increasing the maximum drug concentration and the degree of supersaturation attained, and also to inhibit crystallization or precipitation of drug by interacting with dissolved drug by mechanisms such as complexation, formation of inclusion complexes, formation of micelles or adsorbing to the surface of solid drug, crystalline or amorphous. Curatolo et al. state that these surface active agents may comprise up to 25% of the dispersion. In addition, Curatolo et al. also disclose that surface active agents may be present in compositions containing dispersions. [0007]
  • Nevertheless, what is still desired is a composition that may enhance the dissolution and/or bioavailability of poorly soluble drugs. These needs and others that will become apparent to one of ordinary skill are met by the present invention, which is summarized and described in detail below. [0008]
  • BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention overcomes the drawbacks of the prior art by providing a composition comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material. The combination of a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material results in improved dissolved concentration of the drug in the aqueous use environment, and in some embodiments a surprising synergy. For a given dose of drug, the combination may either provide higher bioavailability with the same amount of concentration-enhancing polymer, or may provide the same bioavailability but with less concentration-enhancing polymer. [0009]
  • In another aspect of the invention, a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer is co-administered with a lipophilic microphase-forming material to an in vivo use environment. Another aspect of the invention comprises a kit comprising a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and a lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0010]
  • The present inventors have found that the ability of a solid amorphous dispersion to enhance the concentration of drug in a use environment may be significantly improved by the addition of certain lipophilic microphase-forming materials. These lipophilic microphase-forming materials, when administered to an aqueous use environment such as the GI tract, form a plurality of small microphases, or so-called “lipophilic microphases.” The lipophilic microphase-forming materials are chosen (1) to be water immiscible, (2) so that the drug has a high partition coefficient with respect to the lipophilic microphases, and (3) so that the resulting lipophilic microphases in the aqueous use environment are small. [0011]
  • Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the present inventors believe that when a composition of the present invention comprising a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and a lipophilic microphase-forming material are introduced to a use environment such as the GI tract, the drug may be present in several different species. When the aqueous use environment is either the GI tract of an animal, or an in vitro use environment that simulates the GI tract of an animal, it is believed that at least five different drug species are formed: (1) free drug; (2) drug present within bile salt micelles that are naturally occurring in the GI tract; (3) polymer/drug assemblies; (4) precipitate; and (5) drug in lipophilic microphases. [0012]
  • As used herein, the term “free drug” refers to drug molecules which are dissolved in the aqueous solution and are generally either monomeric or clusters of no more than about 100 molecules. A “polymer/drug assembly” refers to a collection of polymer molecules and drug molecules which are physically associated to form an assembly or aggregate that is sufficiently small that it remains suspended in solution. “Precipitate” is a general term for any relatively large particulates that form and fall out of solution, either naturally or upon centrifugation. Such precipitate may comprise one or more or all of the following forms: (1) crystalline drug; (2) amorphous drug; and/or (3) a mixture of drug and polymer that is present as particles that are sufficiently large so as to drop out of solution (typically greater than about 5 to 10 microns in average diameter). As used herein, the term “total dissolved drug” refers to the concentration of drug in a use environment that is not present in precipitate. Thus, “total dissolved drug” refers to drug that is present as free drug, drug within bile salt micelles, drug in polymer/drug assemblies, and drug in the lipophilic microphases. [0013]
  • It is desired to increase the free drug concentration in the GI tract because, in general, primarily free drug is directly absorbed from the GI tract into the blood. The absorption rate of a drug from the GI tract to the blood is therefore generally proportional to the free drug concentration at the intestinal membrane surface. Drug present in the other species generally must first convert to the free drug form in order to be absorbed. [0014]
  • The present invention provides one or more of the following advantages over prior methods for enhancing the concentration and bioavailability of low-solubility drugs. The lipophilic microphases are capable of sufficiently solubilizing the drug in the use environment to enhance bioavailability. In some cases, the lipophilic microphases are thought to be (1) highly mobile, meaning that they may diffuse more rapidly throughout the use environment than precipitate; and (2) labile, meaning that the drug may rapidly convert back and forth between the lipophilic microphases and free drug. It is believed that the lipophilic microphases may be more mobile than the polymer/drug assemblies. Because the lipophilic microphases solubilize the drug, the lipophilic microphases may reduce the formation of drug precipitate and increase the amount of total dissolved drug. The lability of the lipophilic microphases may also increase the rate of resupply of free drug in the use environment. As free drug is absorbed, drug present in the lipophilic microphases may rapidly convert to free drug, thus maintaining a sustained free drug concentration. When the lipophilic microphases are small, their high mobility may also increase the rate of drug absorption by the intestines by increasing the transport rate of the drug through the unstirred boundary layer adjacent to the intestinal wall. In combination, these properties may greatly enhance the rate and extent of drug absorption (e.g., bioavailability). [0015]
  • In addition, the compositions may also have the advantage of providing more regular absorption between the fed and fasted state of a patient. A problem when dosing low-solubility, lipophilic drugs is that the absorption of the drug may vary widely between the fed and fasted state of the patient. As previously noted, bile-salt micelles may be present in the GI tract. These micelles can behave in a similar way as the lipophilic microphase-forming materials of the present invention. It is believed that drug can readily partition into such bile-salt micelles, and drug in bile-salt micelles is readily absorbable because it is labile and the micelles are highly mobile. [0016]
  • It is well known in the art that in the fed state, the concentration of bile-salt micelles present in the GI tract is greater than the concentration present in the fasted state. The inventors believe that this difference in the concentration of bile-salt micelles in the GI tract in the fed versus fasted state may account, at least in part, for the fed/fasted differences in bioavailability observed for many pharmaceutical compositions. The compositions of the present invention comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material may minimize this fed/fasted difference in bioavailability. The compositions tend to equalize the amount of drug present in highly labile, highly mobile species between the fed and fasted state, and thus provide a more uniform bioavailability between the fed and fasted state. [0017]
  • The foregoing and other objectives, features, and advantages of the invention will be more readily understood upon consideration of the following detailed description of the invention. [0018]
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • The present invention provides in one aspect a composition comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer, and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material. The lipophilic microphase-forming material may either be present in the dispersion itself, may be mixed with the dispersion, or may be separate from but co-administered with the dispersion. Suitable lipophilic microphase-forming materials, drugs and polymers, and methods for making the compositions, are discussed in more detail below. [0019]
  • Lipophilic Microphase-Forming Materials [0020]
  • The lipophilic microphase-forming material may comprise a surfactant and/or a lipophilic material. Thus, as used herein, the “lipophilic microphase-forming material” is intended to include blends of materials in addition to a single material. The lipophilic microphase-forming material must (1) be water immiscible (2) be capable of forming a plurality of small lipophilic microphases in the use environment and (3) have a relatively high partition coefficient for the drug in the use environment. [0021]
  • The lipophilic microphase-forming material must be “water immiscible,”meaning that the material when administered as prescribed herein to an in vivo aqueous use environment exceeds its solubility as solvated molecules thus requiring the formation of a second phase. Ideally such a second phase takes the form of a large number of small phases such as micelles or a microemulsion. The lipophilic microphase is a separate phase in the aqueous use environment; the separate phase ranging from extremely small aggregates such as micelles or as large droplets up to a few microns in size. Thus, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is not completely water soluble. The lipophilic microphase-forming material also is capable of forming a plurality of small lipophilic microphases in an in vivo aqueous use environment without the need for stirring, agitation or other mechanical energy. The material need not be self-emulsifying. Nevertheless, preferably the lipophilic microphase-forming material should not agglomerate into a single phase within the use environment, but should remain as a plurality of microphases for at least 1 hour and preferably longer. When the composition is administered to an in vitro aqueous use environment, the lipophilic microphase-forming material should form a plurality of microphases with at most only slight agitation of the use environment. The microphases remain small for at least 1 hour, and more preferably at least 4 hours, after administration to the use environment. [0022]
  • It should be noted that some lipophilic materials that do not form a plurality of microphases when administered alone may often form such phases when administered with the polymer/drug solid amorphous dispersions. This is particularly true when the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug and the polymer in the solid amorphous dispersion. [0023]
  • The resulting lipophilic microphases formed in the aqueous use environment are small. By “small” is meant that the lipophilic microphase-forming material forms lipophilic microphases that are generally less than about 10 μm in characteristic diameter. By “characteristic diameter” is meant the volume average diameter of the microphase in the use environment. The characteristic diameter may be determined by standard measurement techniques, such as dynamic light scattering and static light scattering, or by examination via optical- or scanning-election microscopy, transmission-electron microscopy, coulter-counting methods, and size-exclusion field-flow fractionation. The resulting particles may be smaller, such as less than 1 μm in characteristic diameter, less than 100 nm in characteristic diameter, and less than 50 nm in characteristic diameter. The size of the microphases depends on the other components of the composition, such as the drug and polymer, the manner in which the components of the composition are combined, (such as having the lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersed within the polymer/drug dispersion), as well as the components of the use environment. This is particularly true in an in vivo use environment where the presence of proteins, bile salts, and other surface active agents may cause some compositions to form suitably small lipophilic microphases even though they do not form such microphases in in vitro tests. In addition, it is well known that, in the in vivo environment, many lipophilic microphase-forming materials such as mono-, di-, and tri-glycerides may undergo chemical conversion to other species that in time form the microphases. Thus the ultimate test of an appropriate lipophilic microphase-forming material and composition is best conducted in the in vivo use environment. [0024]
  • The lability of a drug from the free drug phase into and out of the lipophilic microphase is generally a function of the microphase size. By “lability” is meant the kinetics or rate of drug release or drug partitioning into or out of the microphase. Generally, for a given mass of lipophilic microphase-forming material, lability increases as the size of the microphase decreases. As the solubility of the drug decreases, it is preferable for the characteristic size of the microphase to be smaller. Thus, when the solubility of the drug is extremely low, such as about 1 μg/ml or less, preferred compositions generally form microphases less than about 1 μm in characteristic diameter when dosed to the in vivo use environment. [0025]
  • The drug should also have a relatively high partition coefficient in the lipophilic microphase-forming material. By partition coefficient is meant the ratio of the concentration of drug present in the lipophilic microphases to the free drug concentration as follows: [0026] K p = [ Drug ] lipophile [ Drug ] free ( l )
    Figure US20030228358A1-20031211-M00001
  • where K[0027] p is the partition coefficient, [Drug]lipophile is the concentration of the drug in the lipophilic microphases, and [Drug]free is the free drug concentration.
  • In a given volume of the aqueous use environment, the total amount of drug in the lipophilic microphases is also dependent on the amount of lipophilic microphase present. Thus the concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase per unit volume of the aqueous use environment, [Drug][0028] aqueous,lipophile, is given by:
  • [Drug]aqueous,lipophile =X lipophile ·K p·[Drug]free
  • where X[0029] lipophile is the volume fraction of the lipophilic microphase in the use environment.
  • In situations where the drug is only present as free drug and drug within the lipophilic microphase, the total dissolved drug concentration [Drug][0030] aqueous,total is given by:
  • [D] aqueous,total=[Drug]free+[Drug]aqueous,lipophile   (II)
  • [Drug]aqueous,total=[Drug]free·[1+X lipophile ·K p]
  • In order for the presence of the lipophile to have a large impact on the bioavailability of a composition, there generally must be a significant fraction of the total drug dosed that is within the lipophilic microphase. By significant fraction it is generally meant that at least about 0.1% and preferably at least about 1% of the total drug dosed is present in the use environment within the lipophilic microphase-forming material. According to the above equations, the fraction of the total drug present within the lipophilic microphases generally increases with: (1) increasing K[0031] p, (2) increasing Xlipophile, (3) increasing [Drug]free.
  • Since there are practical limits to the size of oral dosage forms that may be administered, it is generally undesirable to have large values of X[0032] lipophile. For example, when the compositions of the present invention are formed into an oral tablet or capsule for administration, the mass of the tablet or capsule is generally less than about 1000 mg and preferably less than about 700 mg. Since a significant portion of the dosage form must also comprise the active drug and other excipients, the maximum amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material in a single oral dosage form is about 500 mg. When dosed orally to the GI tract of a human, the aqueous volume into which the lipophilic microphase-forming material composition disperses is generally about 50 ml up to about 500 ml, depending on the fed state of the subject. Thus, the maximum practical value for Xlipophile is about 0.001 to 0.01. Thus, for example, when the dose of the drug is 100 mg, it is desirable to have at least 0.1 wt % (0.1 mg) and preferably at least 1 wt % (1 mg) of the drug be present in the lipophilic microphase-forming material. This generally means that the concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase-forming material (in wt %) when the composition is dosed orally to a human is at least about 0.1 mg/500 mg or 0.02 wt % and preferably at least about 0.2 wt % (1 mg/500 mg).
  • The minimum K[0033] p may be determined by determining the Kp necessary to achieve the desired concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase forming material. Since the concentration of drug in the lipophilic microphase-forming material at equilibrium is given by:
  • [Drug]lipophile=[Drug]free ·K p
  • then the minimum K[0034] p may be determined by setting the free drug concentration, [Drug]free, to the maximum aqueous solubility of the drug, Sxtal. The minimum Kp should generally be at least about 0.02 wt %/Sxtal, preferably greater than about 0.2 wt %/Sxtal, more preferably greater than about 0.5 wt %/Sxtal, even more preferably greater than about 1 wt %/Sxtal, and most preferably greater than about 2 wt %/Sxtal. (The maximum aqueous solubility, Sxtal, is the maximum solubility of the thermodynamically most stable crystalline form of the drug, or the undispersed amorphous form if the crystalline form is unknown, over the physiologically pH range of 1-8.) Thus, when the maximum aqueous solubility of the drug is about 100 μg/ml or about 0.01 wt %, then Kp should be greater than about 2 (0.02 wt %/0.01 wt %), preferably greater than about 20 (0.2 wt %/0.01 wt %), more preferably greater than about 50 (0.5 wt %/0.01 wt %), even more preferably greater than 100 (1 wt %/0.01 wt %), and most preferably greater than 200 (2 wt %/0.01 wt %). Thus, the minimum and preferred minimum values for Kp for various drug solubilities are given as follows:
    Even
    More More Most
    Sxtal Preferred Preferred Preferred Preferred
    (μg/ml) Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
    [wt %] Kp Kp Kp Kp Kp
    100 2 20 50 100 200
    [0.01]
     10 20 200 500 1,000 2,000
    [0.001]
     1.0 200 2,000 5,000 10,000 20,000
    [1 × 10−4]
     0.1 2,000 20,000 50,000 100,000 200,000
    [1 × 10−5]
     0.01 20,000 200,000 500,000 1,000,000 2,000,000
    [1 × 10−6]
  • The partition coefficient K[0035] p for a drug in a particular lipophilic microphase-forming material may be determined by any method or series of experiments in which the concentration of drug present as free drug and drug present in lipophilic microphases can be determined. One exemplary method is as follows. Crystalline drug (or amorphous drug if the crystalline form of the drug is not known) is added to an appropriate buffer solution such as PBS (described below) at an amount such that if all of the drug dissolved the concentration would be greater than the equilibrium solubility of the drug. The concentration of free drug in the solution is then determined by any technique that can quantitatively measure the amount of dissolved drug in solution, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy. Typically, this is accomplished by collecting a sample of the solution containing the drug and either filtering or centrifuging the sample to remove undissolved drug species, and then analyzing the concentration of the remaining dissolved drug. This technique provides the value of [Drug]free in Equation I. Next, crystalline drug is added to an appropriate buffer solution to which various amounts of the lipophilic microphase-forming material had been added, such as 1 vol %, 2 vol % and 3 vol %, again at an amount such that if all of the drug dissolved the concentration of drug either present as free drug or in the lipophilic microphase would be greater than the equilibrium solubility of the drug with the lipophilic microphase-forming material present.
  • The total concentration of total dissolved drug, that is the sum of drug present as free drug plus drug present in lipophilic microphases, (as given in Equation II)—is determined using the same techniques described above. The total dissolved drug concentration [Drug][0036] aqueous,total is then plotted versus the vol % lipophilic microphase-forming material in the solution. The slope of the line for this graph is equal to the product of the free drug concentration (which is normally assumed to be equal to the solubility of the drug in the absence of the lipophilic microphase-forming material, or Sxtal) and Kp. Thus, Kp=slope/Sxtal. When the aqueous solubility of the lipophilic microphase-forming material or the “critical micelle concentration” (CMC) of the lipophilic microphase-forming material is very small relative to the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material used in the above experiment, the y-intercept of the line through the data points is approximately equal to the crystalline drug solubility, Sxtal. When the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material used is only slightly larger than the CMC or the lipophilic microphase-forming material aqueous solubility, then the values of Xlipophile should be corrected by subtracting the CMC or solubility from the total volume fraction of lipophilic microphase-forming material added to the solution.
  • In a preferred embodiment of this invention, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is part of the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer. In such cases, it is preferred that the dispersion comprise no greater than 50 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material, preferably no greater than 40 wt %, more preferably no greater than 30 wt %. When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, the glass-transition temperature (T[0037] g) of the dispersion may be reduced if the melting point of the lipophilic microphase-forming material is low, potentially leading to reduced stability of the drug in the dispersion. However, in many cases the addition of the lipophilic microphase-forming material also increases the solubility of the drug in the polymer plus lipophilic microphase-forming material matrix. As a result its addition may improve the stability of the dispersion regardless of its effect on Tg. In cases where it is necessary to keep the Tg of the dispersion high and the lipophilic microphase-forming material is part of the dispersion, it is generally preferable for the material, if crystalline, to have a relatively high melting point and if amorphous to have a relatively high Tg. Thus, the melt temperature or Tg of the lipophilic microphase-forming material should be sufficiently high such that the Tg of the dispersion is at least 50° C. when tested under ambient humidity conditions (e.g., 50% relative humidity). More preferably, the Tg of the dispersion is at least 70° C. at 50% relative humidity, and most preferably at least 100° C. at 50% relative humidity. Other factors, such as the Tg of the drug, the Tg of the concentration-enhancing polymer, the drug:polymer ratio, and the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material included in the dispersion may affect the Tg of the dispersion, and these factors should be considered when selecting a lipophilic microphase-forming material to use in a composition.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is a solid oral dosage form comprising the novel compositions. The solid dosage form may take the form of one or more tablets or capsules or a multiplicity of particles or granules. When the solid dosage form is one or more tablets or capsules, the dosage form may be taken orally by swallowing whole, chewed and then swallowed, or the dosage form may disintegrate and optionally dissolve in the mouth and then be swallowed. When the solid dosage form is a multiplicity of small particles or granules the powder or granules may be ingested by any known method, including first dispersing in an aqueous vehicle and then swallowing, or mixing with food and then ingesting along with the food. [0038]
  • In order for the compositions of the present invention to be efficiently formed into solid dosage forms it is generally desirable for the lipophilic microphase-forming materials to have relatively high melting points and relatively high T[0039] g values. However, even lipophilic microphase-forming materials that are liquid at room temperature may be formed into solid dosage forms as long as the amount incorporated into the dosage form is not too high.
  • When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is either a liquid at room temperature or becomes liquid at a temperature of about 50° C. or less, a preferred embodiment is to disperse the lipophilic microphase-forming material in a solid excipient. The lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed to the surface of a solid material such as microcrystalline cellulose; silica; dibasic calcium phosphate; calcium silicate (Zeodor™); clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; Na-, Al-, and Fe-montmorillonite; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil® or Aerosil®); magnesium trisilicate; aluminum hydroxide; magnesium hydroxide, magnesium oxide or talc. Highly porous materials such as calcium silicate are preferred. This embodiment has the advantage of separating the lipophilic microphase-forming material from the solid amorphous dispersion, thus minimizing the effect of the lipophilic microphase-forming material on the glass transition temperature of the dispersion. As described in more detail below, it is desired that the dispersion have a high glass transition temperature in order to provide good physical stability. [0040]
  • Alternatively, it may be dispersed in a water soluble or water dispersible polymer, as either a separate phase, or homogeneously throughout the polymer. In one preferred embodiment, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed in a concentration-enhancing polymer. Such lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersions serve to (1) render the lipophilic microphase-forming material solid to aid in incorporation into solid dosage forms, (2) aid in dispersing of the lipophilic microphase-forming material as a microphase, and (3) provide additional concentration-enhancing polymer for generating and sustaining high concentrations of dissolved drug. In an often particularly preferred embodiment, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug, in one or more concentration enhancing polymers to form a single dispersion comprising the drug, the one or more concentration-enhancing polymers, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Such lipophilic microphase-forming material dispersions are often preferred even when the lipophilic microphase-forming material is a solid below about 50° C. [0041]
  • The lipophilic microphase-forming material may be either hydrophobic, amphiphilic, or a mixture of a hydrophobic and an amphiphilic material. By “amphiphilic” material is meant a material that has both hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions. Since hydrophobic materials alone tend not to form small microphases in an aqueous use environment, amphiphilic and mixtures of amphiphilic and hydrophobic materials are preferred. However, it is known that some such hydrophobic materials will form microphases due to the influence of (1) other excipients such as the concentration-enhancing polymer, (2) the drug itself, or (3) naturally occurring components of the GI tract. Thus, hydrophobic materials alone form a part of the invention as long as they form suitably small microphases when the compositions or dosage forms are administered to a use environment. The use of a mixture of hydrophobic and amphiphilic material may be preferred because the hydrophobic material often provides a higher partition coefficient, while the amphiphilic material may limit or reduce the size of the lipophilic microphases in the use environment. Thus, such mixtures may have higher lability and higher partition coefficients. [0042]
  • Generally, the lipophilic microphase-forming materials have a molecular weight of less than about 20,000 daltons. However, most lipophilic microphase-forming materials have molecular weights below about 2,000 daltons. Additionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming materials are water immiscible and form lipophilic microphases. The lipophilic microphase-forming material is therefore distinct from the concentration-enhancing polymer. The concentration-enhancing polymers generally have molecular weights of greater than about 10,000 daltons, are more soluble or dispersible in the use environment, and are generally less hydrophobic. [0043]
  • Examples of amphiphilic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include: sulfonated hydrocarbons and their salts, such as sodium 1,4-bis(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate, also known as docusate sodium (CROPOL) and sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS); poloxamers, also referred to as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers (PLURONICs, LUTROLs); polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers (CREMOPHOR A, BRIJ); polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters (polysorbates, TWEEN); short-chain glyceryl mono-alkylates (HODAG, IMWITTOR, MYRJ); polyglycolized glycerides (GELUCIREs); mono- and di-alkylate esters of polyols, such as glycerol; nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene 20 sorbitan monooleate, (polysorbate 80, sold under the trademark TWEEN 80, available commercially from ICI); polyoxyethylene 20 sorbitan monolaurate (Polysorbate 20, TWEEN 20); polyethylene (40 or 60) hydrogenated castor oil (available under the trademarks CREMOPHOR® RH40 and RH60 from BASF); polyoxyethylene (35) castor oil (CREMOPHOR® EL); polyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil (Nikkol HCO-60); alpha tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (Vitamin E TPGS); glyceryl PEG 8 caprylate/caprate (available commercially under the registered trademark LABRASOL® from Gattefosse); PEG 32 glyceryl laurate (sold commercially under the registered trademark GELUCIRE 44/14 by Gattefosse), polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters (available commercially under the registered trademark MYRJ from ICI), polyoxyethylene fatty acid ethers (available commercially under the registered trademark BRIJ from ICI). Alkylate esters of polyols may be considered amphiphilic or hydrophobic depending on the number of alkylates per molecule and the number of carbons in the alkylate. When the polyol is glycerol, mono- and di-alkylates are often considered amphiphilic while trialkylates of glycerol are generally considered hydrophobic. However, some scientists classify even medium chain mono- and di-glycerides as hydrophobic. See for example Patel et al U.S. Pat. No. 6,294,192 (B1), which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference. Regardless of the classification, compositions comprising mono- and di-glycerides are preferred compositions of this invention. Other suitable amphiphilic materials may be found in Patel, U.S. Pat. No. 6,294,192 and are listed as “hydrophobic non-ionic surfactants and hydrophilic ionic surfactants.”[0044]
  • It should be noted that some amphiphilic materials may not be water immiscible by themselves, but instead are at least somewhat water soluble. Such amphiphilic materials may nevertheless be used in mixtures to form the lipophilic microphase, particularly when used as mixtures with hydrophobic materials. [0045]
  • Examples of hydrophobic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include: medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and tri-alkylates (CAPMUL MCM, MIGLYOL 810, MYVEROL 18-92, ARLACEL 186, fractionated coconut oil, light vegetable oils); sorbitan esters (ARLACEL 20, ARLACEL 40); long-chain fatty alcohols (stearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cetostearyl alcohol); long-chain fatty-acids (stearic acid); and phospholipids (egg lecithin, soybean lecithin, vegetable lecithin, sodium taurocholic acid, and 1,2-diacyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, such as 1-palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocoline, 1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, 1-plamitoyl-2-stearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine, and other natural or synthetic phosphatidyl cholines); mono and diglycerides of capric and caprylic acid under the following registered trademarks: Capmul® MCM, MCM 8, and MCM 10, available commercially from Abitec, and Imwitor® 988, 742 or 308, available commercially from Condea Vista; polyoxyethylene 6 apricot kernel oil, available under the registered trademark Labrafil® M 1944 CS from Gattefosse; polyoxyethylene corn oil, available commercially as Labrafil® M 2125; propylene glycol monolaurate, available commercially as Lauroglycol from Gattefosse; propylene glycol dicaprylate/caprate available commercially as Captex® 200 from Abitec or Miglyol® 840 from Condea Vista, polyglyceryl oleate available commercially as Plurol oleique from Gattefosse, sorbitan esters of fatty acids (e.g., Span® 20, Crill® 1, Crill® 4, available commercially from ICI and Croda), and glyceryl monooleate (Maisine, Peceol); medium chain triglycerides (MCT, C6-C12) and long chain triglycerides (LCT, C14-C20) and mixtures of mono-, di-, and triglycerides, or lipophilic derivatives of fatty acids such as esters with alkyl alcohols; fractionated coconut oils, such as Miglyol® 812 which is a 56% caprylic (C8) and 36% capric (C10) triglyceride, Miglyol® 810 (68% C8 and 28% C10), Neobee® M5, Captex® 300, Captex® 355, and Crodamol® GTCC; (Miglyols are supplied by Condea Vista Inc. (Huls), Neobee® by Stepan Europe, Voreppe, France, Captex by Abitec Corp., and Crodamol by Croda Corp); vegetable oils such as soybean, safflower, corn, olive, cottonseed, arachis, sunflowerseed, palm, or rapeseed; fatty acid esters of alkyl alcohols such as ethyl oleate and glyceryl monooleate. Other hydrophobic materials suitable for use as the lipophilic microphase-forming material include those listed in Patel, U.S. Pat. No. 6,294,192 as “hydrophobic surfactants.” Exemplary classes of hydrophobic materials include: fatty alcohols; polyoxyethylene alkylethers; fatty acids; glycerol fatty acid monoesters; glycerol fatty acid diesters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid monoesters; acetylated glycerol fatty acid diesters, lower alcohol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polypropylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene glycerides; lactic acid derivatives of monoglycerides; lactic acid derivatives of diglycerides; propylene glycol diglycerides; sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers; transesterified vegetable oils; sterols; sterol derivatives; sugar esters; sugar ethers; sucroglycerides; polyoxyethylene vegetable oils; polyoxyethylene hydrogenated vegetable oils; reaction products of polyols and at least one member of the group consisting of fatty acids, glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, and sterols; and mixtures thereof. Mixtures of relatively hydrophilic materials, such as those termed herein as “amphiphilic” or in Patel as “hydrophilic surfactants” and the above hydrophobic materials are particularly suitable. Specifically, the mixtures of hydrophobic surfactants and hydrophilic surfactants disclosed by Patel are suitable and for many compositions, preferred. However, unlike Patel, mixtures that include triglycerides as a hydrophobic component are also suitable. [0046]
  • In one embodiment, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is selected from the group consisting of polyglycolized glycerides (GELUCIREs); polyethylene (40 or 60) hydrogenated castor oil (available under the trademarks CREMOPHOR® RH40 and RH60 from BASF); polyoxyethylene (35) castor oil (CREMOPHOR® EL); polyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil (Nikkol HCO-60); alpha tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (Vitamin E TPGS); glyceryl PEG 8 caprylate/caprate (available commercially under the registered trademark LABRASOL® from Gattefosse); PEG 32 glyceryl laurate (sold commercially under the registered trademark GELUCIRE 44/14 by Gattefosse); polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters (available commercially under the registered trademark MYRJ from ICI); polyoxyethylene fatty acid ethers (available commercially under the registered trademark BRIJ from ICI); polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers (PLURONICs, LUTROLs); polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers (CREMOPHOR A, BRIJ); long-chain fatty alcohols (stearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cetostearyl alcohol); long-chain fatty-acids (stearic acid); polyoxyethylene 6 apricot kernel oil, available under the registered trademark Labrafil® M 1944 CS from Gattefosse; polyoxyethylene corn oil, available commercially as Labrafil® M 2125; propylene glycol monolaurate, available commercially as Lauroglycol from Gattefosse; polyglyceryl oleate available commercially as Plurol oleique from Gattefosse; triglycerides, including medium chain triglycerides (MCT, C[0047] 6-C12) and long chain triglycerides (LCT, C14-C20); fractionated coconut oils, such as Miglyol® 812 which is a 56% caprylic (C8) and 36% capric (C10) triglyceride, Miglyol® 810 (68% C8 and 28% C10), Neobee® M5, Captex® 300, Captex® 355, and Crodamol® GTCC; (Miglyols are supplied by Condea Vista Inc. [Huls], Neobee® by Stepan Europe, Voreppe, France, Captex by Abitec Corp., and Crodamol by Croda Corp); vegetable oils such as soybean, safflower, corn, olive, cottonseed, arachis, sunflowerseed, palm, or rapeseed; polyoxyethylene alkylethers; fatty acids; lower alcohol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters; polypropylene glycol fatty acid esters; polyoxyethylene glycerides; lactic acid derivatives of monoglycerides; lactic acid derivatives of diglycerides; propylene glycol diglycerides; transesterified vegetable oils; sterols; sterol derivatives; sugar esters; sugar ethers; sucroglycerides; polyoxyethylene vegetable oils; polyoxyethylene hydrogenated vegetable oils; reaction products of polyols and at least one member of the group consisting of fatty acids, glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, and sterols; and mixtures thereof.
  • Especially preferred lipophilic microphase-forming materials include mixtures of polyethoxylated castor oils and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri-alkylates, (such as mixtures of CREMOPHOR RH40 and CAPMUL MCM), mixtures of polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri-alkylates, (such as mixtures of TWEEN 80 and CAPMUL MCM), mixtures of polyethoxylated castor oils and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri- alkylates, (such as mixtures of CREMOPHOR RH40 and ARLACEL 20), mixtures of sodium taurocholic acid and palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine and other natural or synthetic phosphatidylcholines, and mixtures of polyglycolized glycerides and medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and/or tri-alkylates, (such as mixtures of Gelucire 44/14 and CAPMUL MCM). [0048]
  • The lipophilic microphase-forming material is present in a sufficient amount so that the combination of the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provides concentration enhancement, as described more fully below. In general, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is either present in the composition or co-administered with the solid amorphous dispersion such that the weight ratio of the lipophilic microphase-forming material to drug (hereinafter referred to as the lipophile:drug ratio) ranges from 0.1 to 100 (wt/wt), and more typically from 0.2 to 50. [0049]
  • The optimum amount of the lipophilic microphase-forming material depends on the mass of the dose of the drug, the partition coefficient, and the solubility of the drug. The optimum mass of the lipophilic microphase-forming material increases as the mass of the dose increases. The optimum mass of the lipophilic microphase-forming material decreases as the partition coefficient increases and as the solubility increases. [0050]
  • Nevertheless, in general, the amount of lipophilic microphase forming material present in the composition should not be so high that the concentration of free drug obtained in the use environment is much lower than that obtained when less lipophilic microphase-forming material is combined with the solid amorphous dispersion and is introduced to the use environment. Generally, when the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material that is added to the composition is greater than the amount such that all of the drug introduced to the use environment is either present as free drug, or is in the lipophilic microphases, then the performance, in terms of improving drug absorption, will be reduced relative to lower levels of the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Thus, it is preferred for compositions to contain less than this “maximum preferred level.” Nonetheless, levels of lipophilic microphase-forming material somewhat above this level may still improve drug absorption relative to the dispersion alone. This maximum preferred level will depend on the free drug concentration ([Drug][0051] free, typically given in mg/ml), the density of the lipophilic microphase-forming material (ρlipophile, typically given in mg/ml), and the partition coefficient (Kp). The maximum preferred lipophile:drug ratio is given by the following equation:
  • Maximum lipophile:drug ratio=ρlipophile/(K p·[Drug]free)
  • It should be noted that for some values of K[0052] p and [Drug]free, the maximum preferred lipophile:drug ratio will be quite large. For example, when ρlipophile=1000 mg/mL, Kp=100, and [Drug]free=0.001 mg/mL, the maximum preferred lipophile:drug ratio is calculated to be 10,000. If the drug dose is, for example 100 mg, this results in a maximum preferred lipophile dose of 1000 g. Such high doses of lipophile are impractical. Thus when the value of Kp and/or [Drug]free are low, the maximum preferred lipophile:drug ratio may be limited by practical considerations such as the maximum dose well tolerated by the subject or the maximum practical size of the dosage form.
  • Preparation of Compositions [0053]
  • Compositions of the present invention may be prepared according to any technique that results in a mixture comprising (1) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) a lipophilic microphase-forming material. In one method, a solid amorphous dispersion of the drug, polymer and lipophilic microphase-forming material is formed so that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion itself. Alternatively, a solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer may be formed and then mixed with the lipophilic microphase-forming material so that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is mixed with but not included within the dispersion. As yet another alternative, the solid amorphous dispersion of the drug and polymer may be prepared and then co-administered with a lipophilic microphase-forming material to a use environment, so that the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are both present in the use environment. [0054]
  • Dispersions of a low-solubility drug and polymer may be made according to any known process which results in at least a “major portion” (meaning at least 60 wt %) of the drug being in the amorphous state. While the drug in its pure state may be crystalline or amorphous, at least a major portion of the drug in the dispersion is amorphous. By “amorphous” is meant simply that the drug is in a non-crystalline state. As used herein, the term “a major portion” of the drug means that at least 60 wt % of the drug in the dispersion is in the amorphous form. It has also been found that the aqueous concentration of the drug in a use environment tends to improve as the fraction of drug present in the amorphous state in the dispersion increases. Accordingly the drug in the dispersion may be substantially amorphous, and preferably may be almost completely amorphous. As used herein, “substantially amorphous” means that at least 75 wt % of the drug is amorphous and “almost completely amorphous” means that at least 90 wt % of the drug is amorphous. The amount of drug in the dispersion which is amorphous or crystalline may be measured by powder X-ray diffraction, Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) analysis, differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), or any other standard quantitative measurement. [0055]
  • The amorphous drug can exist as a pure phase, as a solid solution of drug homogeneously distributed throughout the polymer or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them. The dispersion is preferably “substantially homogeneous” so that the amorphous drug is dispersed as homogeneously as possible throughout the polymer. Dispersions of the present invention that are substantially homogeneous generally have improved concentration-enhancing properties and, in turn improved bioavailability, relative to nonhomogeneous dispersions. As used herein, “substantially homogeneous” means that the drug present in relatively pure amorphous domains within the solid dispersion is relatively small, on the order of less than 20%, and preferably less than 10% of the total amount of drug. [0056]
  • While the dispersion may have some drug-rich domains, it is preferred that the dispersion itself have a single glass transition temperature (T[0057] g) which demonstrates that the dispersion is substantially homogeneous. This contrasts with a simple physical mixture of pure amorphous drug particles and pure amorphous polymer particles which generally displays two distinct Tgs, one that of the drug and one that of the polymer. Tg as used herein is the characteristic temperature where a glassy material, upon gradual heating, undergoes a relatively rapid (e.g., 10 to 100 seconds) physical change from a glass state to a rubber state. Dispersions with more than one Tg, indicating at least partial amorphous phase separation, may also function well, particularly when neither amorphous phase is comprised only of amorphous drug, but rather also contains a significant amount of concentration-enhancing polymer.
  • When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, it may exist as a pure lipophilic phase, as a solid solution of the lipophilic microphase-forming material homogeneously distributed throughout the dispersion, or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them. Generally, it is preferred that the lipophilic microphase-forming material be well distributed throughout the dispersion, either as small, preferably less than 1 μm in diameter, relatively pure domains of lipophilic microphase-forming material, or more preferably, dispersed such that it is at least partially dissolved in the drug and polymer solid amorphous dispersion. [0058]
  • The solid amorphous dispersions of the drug and polymer may be made according to any conventional process for forming dispersions. When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, such dispersions may also be made according to any conventional process for forming dispersions. Such processes include mechanical, thermal and solvent processes. Exemplary mechanical processes include milling and extrusion; melt processes include high temperature fusion, solvent modified fusion and melt-congeal processes; and solvent processes include non-solvent precipitation, spray coating and spray-drying. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,456,923 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,099 which describe formation of dispersions via extrusion processes; U.S. Pat. No. 5,340,591 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,673,564 which describe forming dispersions by milling processes; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,707,646 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,894,235 which describe the formation of dispersions via melt/congeal processes, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference. [0059]
  • In one embodiment, the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer may be formed via a melt-congeal or melt-extrusion process. Such processes are particularly suitable when the drug has a relatively low melting point, typically less than about 200° C. and preferably less than about 150° C. In such processes, a molten mixture comprising the drug and concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally, lipophilic microphase-forming material, is rapidly cooled such that the molten mixture solidifies to form a solid amorphous dispersion. By “molten mixture” is meant that the mixture comprising the drug and concentration-enhancing polymer is about 10° C. or more above the melting point of the lowest melting point component in the composition. The drug may exist in the molten mixture as a pure phase, as a solution of drug homogeneously distributed throughout the molten mixture, or any combination of these states or those states that lie intermediate between them. The molten mixture is preferably substantially homogeneous so that the drug is dispersed as homogeneously as possible throughout the molten mixture. As mentioned above, it is also desirable that the lipophilic microphase-forming material be dispersed as homogeneously as possible throughout the molten mixture. When the temperature of the molten mixture is below the melting point of both the drug and the concentration-enhancing polymer, the molten excipients, concentration-enhancing polymer, and drug are preferably sufficiently soluble in each other that a substantial portion of the drug disperses in the concentration-enhancing polymer or excipients. It is often preferred that the mixture be heated above the lower of the melting point of the concentration-enhancing polymer, the drug, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material, if present. [0060]
  • Generally, the processing temperature may vary from 50° C. up to about 200° C. or higher, depending on the melting point of the drug and polymer, which is a function of the polymer grade selected, and the lipophilic microphase-forming material, if present. However, the processing temperature should not be so high that an unacceptably high level of degradation of the drug or polymer occurs. In some cases, the molten mixture should be formed under an inert atmosphere to prevent degradation of the drug and/or polymer at the processing temperature. When relatively high temperatures are used, it is often preferable to minimize the time that the mixture is at the elevated temperature to minimize degradation. [0061]
  • The molten mixture may also comprise an excipient that will reduce the melting temperature of the composition (either the drug and/or the polymer), allowing processing at lower temperature. When such excipients have low volatility and substantially remain in the mixture upon solidification, they generally can comprise up to 30 wt % of the molten mixture. For example, a plasticizer may be added to the composition to reduce the melting temperature of the polymer. Examples of plasticizers include water, triethylcitrate, triacetin, and dibutyl sebacate. Volatile agents that dissolve or swell the polymer, such as acetone, water, methanol, and ethyl acetate, may also be added in low quantities to reduce the melting point of the composition. When such volatile excipients are added, at least a portion, up to essentially all of such excipients, may evaporate in the process of or following conversion of the molten mixture to a solid mixture. In such cases, the processing may be considered to be a combination of solvent processing and melt-congealing or melt-extrusion. Removal of such volatile excipients from the molten mixture can be accomplished by breaking up or atomizing the molten mixture into small droplets and contacting the droplets with a fluid such that the droplets both cool and lose all or part of the volatile excipient. Examples of other excipients that can be added to the composition to reduce the processing temperature include low molecular weight polymers or oligomers, such as polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and poloxamers; fats and oils, including mono-, di-, and triglycerides; natural and synthetic waxes, such as carnauba wax, beeswax, microcrystalline wax, castor wax, and paraffin wax; long-chain alcohols, such as cetyl alcohol and stearyl alcohol; and long-chain fatty acids, such as stearic acid. When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is added to the molten mixture, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may act to reduce the melting temperature of the composition. As mentioned above, when the excipient added is volatile, it may be removed from the mixture while still molten or following solidification to form the solid amorphous dispersion. [0062]
  • Virtually any process may be used to form the molten mixture. One method involves melting the concentration-enhancing polymer in a vessel and then adding the drug, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material, to the molten polymer. Another method involves melting the drug, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material, in a vessel and then adding the concentration-enhancing polymer. As the lipophilic microphase-forming material may often be a liquid at room temperature or may have a low melting point relative to the polymer, it is often preferred to use this last method. In yet another method, a solid blend of the drug, concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material, may be added to a vessel and the blend heated to form the molten mixture. When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is included in the dispersion, it may be mixed with the drug and polymer before or after forming the molten mixture. Alternatively, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may first be melted, if it is not already liquid, and the drug and polymer added to the molten lipophilic microphase-forming material to form the molten mixture. [0063]
  • Once the molten mixture is formed, it may be mixed to ensure the drug is homogeneously distributed throughout the molten mixture. Such mixing may be done using mechanical means, such as overhead mixers, magnetically driven mixers and stir bars, planetary mixers,-and homogenizers. Optionally, when the molten mixture is formed in a vessel, the contents of the vessel can be pumped out of the vessel and through an in-line or static mixer and then returned to the vessel. The amount of shear used to mix the molten mixture should be sufficiently high to ensure uniform distribution of the drug in the molten mixture. The molten mixture can be mixed from a few minutes to several hours, the mixing time being dependent on the viscosity of the mixture and the solubility of the drug and any optional excipients in the concentration-enhancing polymer. [0064]
  • An alternative method of preparing the molten mixture is to use two vessels, melting the drug and optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material in the first vessel and the concentration-enhancing polymer and optionally, lipophilic microphase-forming material in a second vessel. The two melts are then pumped through an in-line static mixer or extruder to produce the molten mixture that is then rapidly solidified. [0065]
  • Alternatively, the molten mixture can be generated using an extruder, such as a single-screw or twin-screw extruder, both well known in the art. In such devices, a solid, or semi-solid mixture of the composition is fed to the extruder whereby the combination of heat and shear forces within the extruder produce a uniformly mixed molten mixture, which can then be rapidly solidified to form the solid amorphous dispersion. The solid feed can be prepared using methods well known in the art for obtaining solid mixtures with high content uniformity. Alternatively, the extruder may be equipped with two or more feeders, allowing the drug, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, to be fed to the extruder through one feeder and the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, through the other. Other excipients to reduce the processing temperature as described above may be included in the solid feed, or in the case of liquid excipients, such as water, may be injected into the extruder using methods well-known in the art. [0066]
  • The extruder should be designed such that it produces a molten mixture with the drug uniformly distributed throughout the composition. The various zones in the extruder should be heated to appropriate temperatures to obtain the desired extrudate temperature as well as the desired degree of mixing or shear, using procedures well known in the art. [0067]
  • When the drug has a high solubility in the concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, a lower amount of mechanical energy will be required to form the dispersion. In such cases, when the melting point of the undispersed drug is greater than the melting point of the undispersed concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, the processing temperature may be below the melting temperature of the undispersed drug but greater than the melting point of the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, since the drug will dissolve into the molten polymer, and if present, the lipophilic microphase-forming material. When the melting point of the undispersed drug is less than the melting point of the undispersed concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, the processing temperature may be above the melting point of the undispersed drug but below the melting point of the undispersed concentration-enhancing polymer since the molten drug will dissolve in the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material, or be absorbed into the polymer. [0068]
  • When the drug has a low solubility in the polymer and optional lipophilic microphase-forming material, a higher amount of mechanical energy may be required to form the dispersion. Here, the processing temperature may need to be above the melting point of the drug and the polymer. As mentioned above, alternatively, a liquid or low-melting point excipient may be added that promotes melting or the mutual solubility of the concentration-enhancing polymer and the drug. A high amount of mechanical energy may be needed to mix the drug and the polymer to form a dispersion. Typically, the lowest processing temperature and an extruder design that imparts the lowest amount of mechanical energy (e.g., shear) that produces a satisfactory dispersion (substantially amorphous and substantially homogeneous) is chosen in order to minimize the exposure of the drug to harsh conditions. [0069]
  • Once the molten mixture of drug, concentration-enhancing polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material is formed, the mixture should be rapidly solidified to form the solid amorphous dispersion. Rapid solidification is only necessary when the drug and other materials in the molten mixture are not miscible. By “rapidly solidified” is meant that the molten mixture is solidified sufficiently fast such that substantial phase separation of the drug from the other materials does not occur. Typically, this means that the mixture should be solidified in less than about 10 minutes, preferably less than about 5 minutes, more preferably less than about 1 minute. If the mixture is not rapidly solidified, phase separation can occur, if the materials are not miscible at storage temperatures, resulting in the formation of drug-rich phases. Solidification often takes place primarily by cooling the molten mixture to at least about 10° C. and preferably at least about 30° C. below its melting point. As mentioned above, solidification can be additionally promoted by evaporation of all or part of one or more volatile excipients or solvents. To promote rapid cooling and evaporation of volatile excipients, the molten mixture is often formed into a high surface area shape such as a rod or fiber or droplets. For example, the molten mixture can be forced through one or more small holes to form long thin fibers or rods or may be fed to a device, such as an atomizer such as a rotating disk, that breaks the molten mixture up into droplets from 1 μm to 1 cm in diameter. The droplets are then contacted with a relatively cool fluid such as air or nitrogen to promote cooling and evaporation. [0070]
  • Another method for forming solid amorphous dispersions is by “solvent processing,” which consists of dissolution of the drug and one or more concentration-enhancing polymers, as well as, optionally, the one or more materials that make up the lipophilic microphase-forming material, in a common solvent. Optionally, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may also be dissolved or suspended in the solvent. “Common” here means that the solvent, which can be a mixture of compounds, will dissolve the drug and the polymer(s). Although it need not completely dissolve the lipophilic microphase-forming material, it is often preferred to use a solvent in which the lipophilic microphase-forming material is also soluble. After both the drug, the polymer, and optionally the lipophilic microphase-forming material have been dissolved, the solvent is rapidly removed by evaporation or by mixing with a non-solvent. Exemplary processes are spray-drying, spray-coating (pan-coating, fluidized bed coating, etc.), and precipitation by rapid mixing of the polymer and drug solution with CO[0071] 2, water, or some other non-solvent.
  • The solvent may be removed through the process of spray-drying. The term spray-drying is used conventionally and broadly refers to processes involving breaking up liquid mixtures into small droplets (atomization) and rapidly removing solvent from the mixture in a container (spray-drying apparatus) where there is a strong driving force for evaporation of solvent from the droplets. The strong driving force for solvent evaporation is generally provided by maintaining the partial pressure of solvent in the spray-drying apparatus well below the vapor pressure of the solvent at the temperature of the drying droplets. This is accomplished by either (1) maintaining the pressure in the spray-drying apparatus at a partial vacuum (e.g., 0.01 to 0.50 atm); (2) mixing the liquid droplets with a warm drying gas; or (3) both. In addition, a portion of the heat required for evaporation of solvent may be provided by heating the spray solution. [0072]
  • Solvents suitable for spray-drying can be any compound in which the drug and polymer are mutually soluble. If the lipophilic microphase-forming material is part of the dispersion, it may be soluble in the solvent or may be suspended in the solvent. Preferably, the solvent is volatile with a boiling point of 150° C. or less. In addition, the solvent should have relatively low toxicity and be removed from the dispersion to a level that is acceptable according to The International Committee on Harmonization (ICH) guidelines. Removal of solvent to this level may require a processing step such as tray-drying subsequent to the spray-drying or spray-coating process. Preferred solvents include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, iso-propanol, and butanol; ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and methyl iso-butyl ketone; esters such as ethyl acetate and propylacetate; and various other solvents such as acetonitrile, methylene chloride, toluene, and 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Lower volatility solvents such as dimethyl acetamide or dimethylsulfoxide can also be used. Mixtures of solvents, such as 50% methanol and 50% acetone, can also be used, as can mixtures with water as long as the polymer and drug are sufficiently soluble to make the spray-drying process practicable. [0073]
  • Generally, the temperature and flow rate of the drying gas is chosen so that the polymer/drug-solution droplets are dry enough by the time they reach the wall of the apparatus that they are essentially solid, and so that they form a fine powder and do not stick to the apparatus wall. The actual length of time to achieve this level of dryness depends on the size of the droplets. Droplet sizes generally range from 1 μm to 500 μm in diameter, with 5 μm to 100 μm being more typical. The large surface-to-volume ratio of the droplets and the large driving force for evaporation of solvent leads to actual drying times of a few seconds or less, and more typically less than 0.1 second. Solidification times should be less than 100 seconds, preferably less than a few seconds, and more preferably less than 1 second. The size of droplets formed during the spray-drying process are typically less than about 200 μm in diameter. The resultant solid particles thus formed are generally less than about 200 μm in diameter. [0074]
  • Following solidification, the solid powder typically stays in the spray-drying chamber for about 5 to 60 seconds, further evaporating solvent from the solid powder. The final solvent content of the solid dispersion as it exits the dryer should be low, since this reduces the mobility of the drug molecules in the dispersion, thereby improving its stability. Generally, the solvent content of the dispersion as it leaves the spray-drying chamber should be less than 10 wt % and preferably less than 2 wt %. In some cases, it may be preferable to spray a solvent or a solution of a polymer or other excipient into the spray-drying chamber to form granules, so long as the dispersion is not adversely affected. [0075]
  • Spray-drying processes and spray-drying equipment are described generally in Perry's [0076] Chemical Engineers' Handbook, Sixth Edition (R. H. Perry, D. W. Green, J. O. Maloney, eds.) McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1984, pages 20-54 to 20-57. More details on spray-drying processes and equipment are reviewed by Marshall “Atomization and Spray-Drying,” 50 Chem. Eng. Prog. Monogr. Series 2 (1954). Further details of the spray drying procedure are disclosed in commonly owned Provisional U.S. patent applications Ser. Nos. 60/354,080 and 60/353,986, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference (Attorney Docket Nos. PC23195 and PC23203).
  • The amount of polymer relative to the amount of drug present in the solid amorphous dispersion depends on the drug and polymer and may vary widely from a drug-to-polymer weight ratio of from 0.01 to about 4 (e.g., 1 wt % drug to 80 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients in the dispersion). However, in most cases it is preferred that the drug-to-polymer ratio is greater than about 0.05 (4.8 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients) and less than about 2.5 (71 wt % drug in the absence of other excipients). In some embodiments, the addition of the lipophilic microphase-forming material allows for higher drug loadings. Thus, the drug:polymer ratio may be at least 1. [0077]
  • The dispersion is usually in the form of small particles. The particles may be less than 500 μm in diameter, less than 100 μm in diameter, less than 50 μm in diameter, or less than 25 μm in diameter. When the dispersion is formed by spray-drying, the resulting dispersion is in the form of such small particles. When the dispersion is formed by other methods such by melt-congeal or melt-extrusion processes, the resulting dispersion may be sieved, ground, milled, or otherwise processed to yield a plurality of small particles. [0078]
  • In cases where the composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the previously formed solid amorphous dispersion with the lipophilic microphase-forming material, the mixture can be prepared by any method that results in a uniform mixture of the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Mixing processes include physical mixing as well as wet- and dry-granulation and coating processes. The resulting mixture may be a solid composition comprising the dispersion suspended in the lipophilic microphase-forming material, a mixture of separate dispersion particles and lipophilic microphase-forming material particles interspersed with one another, a series of respective layers of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material, or any other mixture of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0079]
  • In many cases, to aid the dispersing of the lipophilic microphase-forming material in the use environment, it is often desirable to disperse the lipophilic microphase-forming material in a water soluble or water dispersable matrix prior to forming the mixture. Alternatively, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed to a water insoluble substrate such as dibasic calcium phosphate, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, silicon dioxide calcium silicate; clays, such as kaolin (hydrated aluminum silicate), bentonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), hectorite and Veegum®; silicon dioxide (Cab-O-Sil®) or Aerosil®); magnesium trisilicate; aluminum hydroxide; magnesium hydroxide, magnesium oxide or talc. Highly porous materials such as calcium silicate are preferred. When the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed in a water dispersable matrix, the dispersion may be formed by any of the processes described previously for forming the polymer/drug dispersion including melt processes such as extrusion, solvent processes such as spray-drying, as well as conventional wet and dry granulation processes. Following forming the adsorbate dispersion or granule of lipophilic microphase-forming material the dispersion or granule containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material may then be blended with the polymer/drug dispersion. [0080]
  • When it is desired to adsorb (or absorb) the lipophilic microphase-forming material onto a solid substrate, the lipophilic microphase-forming material may be adsorbed onto the solid substrate using any conventional method. In one exemplary method, the substrate is initially dried to remove water. The lipophilic microphase-forming material is then combined with the substrate. The lipophilic microphase-forming material may be combined with the substrate by the use of a planetary mixer, a Z-blade mixer, a rotogranulator or similar equipment. Preferably, the amount of lipophilic microphase-forming material is kept sufficiently low so that the mixture of lipophilic microphase-forming material and solid substrate forms a free-flowing powder. The proportion of lipophilic microphase-forming material to solid substrate preferably is less than about 4:1 (wt:wt) lipophilic microphase-forming material to solid substrate. As the weight ratio of lipophilic microphase-forming material to substrate increases, the material becomes cake-like, and then oily or slurry-like. The particular ratio will depend on the porosity of the substrate and the nature of the lipophilic microphase-forming material. The lipophilic microphase-forming material may be diluted in a solvent such as methanol prior to adsorbing the lipophilic microphase-forming material to the solid substrate. The resulting slurry is dried, for example in a vacuum desiccator, to form a solid material comprising the lipophilic microphase-forming material and substrate. This solid material may then be combined with the solid amorphous dispersion. [0081]
  • Mixing methods include convective mixing, shear mixing, or diffusive mixing. Convective mixing involves moving a relatively large mass of material from one part of a powder bed to another, by means of blades or paddles, revolving screw, or an inversion of the powder bed. Shear mixing occurs when slip planes are formed in the material to be mixed. Diffusive mixing involves an exchange of position by single particles. These mixing processes can be performed using equipment in batch or continuous mode. Tumbling mixers (e.g., twin-shell) are commonly used equipment for batch processing. Continuous mixing can be used to improve composition uniformity. Continuous mixers include “in-line” mixers and extruders. Extruders may be single screw or twin-screw. Twin-screw extruders may turn in the same or opposite direction. [0082]
  • Milling may also be employed to combine the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Milling is the mechanical process of reducing the particle size of solids (comminution). Because in some cases milling may alter crystalline structure and cause chemical changes for some materials, milling conditions are generally chosen which do not alter the physical form of the dispersion in the sense that the drug in the dispersion is no longer amorphous. The most common types of milling equipment are the rotary cutter, the hammer, the roller, and fluid energy mills. Equipment choice depends on the characteristics of the ingredients in the composition (e.g., soft, abrasive, or friable). Wet- or dry-milling techniques can be chosen for several of these processes, also depending on the characteristics of the ingredients (e.g. dispersion stability in solvent). The milling process may serve simultaneously as a mixing process if the feed materials are heterogeneous. Conventional mixing and milling processes suitable for use in the present invention are discussed more fully in Lachman, et al., [0083] The Theory and Practice of Industrial Pharmacy (3d Ed. 1986).
  • The dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may also be combined by dry- or wet-granulating processes as long as granulating conditions are chosen such that the dispersion remains a solid amorphous dispersion. In addition to the physical mixtures described above, the compositions of the present invention may constitute any device or collection of devices that accomplishes the objective of delivering to the use environment both the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0084]
  • In a particularly preferred embodiment, the polymer/drug dispersion in lipophilic microphase-forming material, or alternatively, a solid amorphous dispersion of polymer, drug and lipophilic microphase-forming material, are incorporated into the same solid dosage form such as a capsule or tablet. In order to deliver the desired dose of drug to the use environment, more than one such capsule or tablet may be dosed. A solid amorphous dispersion of drug and polymer, together with the lipophilic microphase-forming material, may both be delivered “immediately” to the use environment, meaning that both are substantially released from the dosage form in less than about 30 minutes, or one or both of the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may be delivered over a period of 1 to 20 hours in a sustained, delayed or pulsatile fashion. Thus, the dosage form may be considered a controlled release dosage form in which the dispersion, the lipophilic microphase-forming material or both the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material are delivered to the use environment over a 1- to 20-hour period. [0085]
  • Thus, in the case of oral administration to an animal, the dosage form may constitute a layered tablet wherein one or more layers comprise the dispersion and one or more other layers comprise the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Alternatively, the dosage form may be a coated tablet wherein the tablet core comprises the dispersion and the coating comprises the lipophilic microphase-forming material or wherein the tablet core comprises the lipophilic microphase-forming material and the coating comprises the dispersion (which may be formed during the coating process). In addition, the dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material may even be present in different dosage forms such as tablets or beads and may be administered simultaneously or separately as long as both the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are administered in such a way that the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material are both present in the use environment. In yet another specific embodiment, the polymer/drug dispersion may be dissolved or suspended in an aqueous vehicle containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material and the aqueous suspension subsequently dosed to the use environment. [0086]
  • Concentration-Enhancement [0087]
  • The compositions of the present invention provide concentration-enhancement in a use environment relative to one or more control compositions. The compositions of the present invention may provide concentration-enhancement relative to a first control composition consisting essentially of the solid amorphous dispersion of the drug and polymer but without any lipophilic microphase forming material present. Thus, the lipophilic microphase forming material is either present in the composition or co-administered in a sufficient amount to provide concentration enhancement (as described more fully below) relative to a first control consisting essentially of an equivalent amount of the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer but with no lipophilic microphase forming material present. That is, the first control composition is identical to the composition comprising the solid amorphous dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material except for the absence of the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0088]
  • Alternatively, the compositions of the present invention provide concentration enhancement relative to a second control composition consisting essentially of the same lipophilic microphase-forming material combined with undispersed crystalline drug in an amount equivalent to the amount of drug in the dispersion of the test composition, but with no concentration-enhancing polymer present. Thus, the second control composition is identical to the composition of the invention except that (1) the drug is in the form of undispersed crystalline drug rather than dispersed in the concentration-enhancing polymer and (2) there is no concentration-enhancing polymer present. In cases where more than one crystal form of the drug is known, the control composition consists of the crystalline form that is most thermodynamically stable at ambient conditions (25° C. and 50% relative humidity). In cases where no crystalline form of the drug is known, undispersed amorphous drug may be substituted for crystalline drug. [0089]
  • At a minimum, compositions of the present invention provide concentration enhancement in a use environment relative to at least one of the two above controls. Preferably, compositions of the present invention will provide concentration enhancement in a use environment relative to both of the above two controls. [0090]
  • Compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide concentration-enhancement in either an in vivo or in vitro use environment. In an in vivo use environment, the concentration-enhancement may result in either enhanced relative bioavailability and/or a more regular fed/fasted bioavailability ratio (that is, a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio closer to 1). In an in vitro use environment, concentration enhancement may be either enhanced drug concentration in highly mobile drug species, reduced precipitate, enhanced maximum drug concentration, or enhanced dissolution area under the concentration versus time curve (AUC). [0091]
  • As used herein, a “use environment” can be either the in vivo environment of the GI tract, subdermal, intranasal, buccal, intrathecal, ocular, intraaurial, subcutaneous spaces, vaginal tract, arterial and venous blood vessels, pulmonary tract or intramuscular tissue of an animal, such as a mammal and particularly a human, or the in vitro environment of a test solution, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS). Concentration enhancement may be determined through either in vivo tests or through in vitro dissolution tests. A composition of the present invention meets the concentration enhancement criteria in at least one of the above test environments. [0092]
  • In one aspect, the compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide improved relative bioavailability relative to either the first control composition, the second control composition, or preferably both. Relative bioavailability may be tested in vivo in animals or humans using conventional methods for making such a determination. An in vivo test, such as a crossover study, may be used to determine whether a test composition provides an enhanced relative bioavailability compared with one or both control compositions. It is to be understood by those skilled in the art that such in vivo tests are conventionally carried out under fasted conditions. In an in vivo crossover study a “test composition” of dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is dosed to half a group of test subjects and, after an appropriate washout period (e.g., one week) the same subjects are dosed with a control composition. As described above, the control composition may be either the first control composition which consists of the amorphous dispersion with no lipophilic microphase-forming material present, or the second control composition, which consists of an equivalent amount of the drug in undispersed crystalline form and an equivalent amount of the lipophilic microphase-forming material but with no concentration-enhancing polymer present. The other half of the group is dosed with the control composition first, followed by the test composition. The relative bioavailability is measured as the concentration in the blood (serum or plasma) versus time area under the curve (AUC) determined for the test group divided by the AUC in the blood provided by the control composition. Preferably, this test/control ratio is determined for each subject, and then the ratios are averaged over all subjects in the study. In vivo determinations of AUC can be made by plotting the serum or plasma concentration of drug along the ordinate (y-axis) against time along the abscissa (x-axis). [0093]
  • To demonstrate improved bioavailability relative to the first control composition and the second control composition, a “three-way in vivo crossover” study may be conducted where the three compositions are the test composition, the first control composition and the second composition. [0094]
  • A preferred embodiment is one in which the relative bioavailability of the test composition is at least 1.25 relative to either the first control composition or the second control composition. (That is, the AUC in the blood provided by the test composition is at least 1.25-fold the AUC provided by the control composition.) The relative bioavailability may be at least 2.0, and more preferably at least 3.0, relative to either control composition. The determination of AUCs is a well-known procedure and is described, for example, in Welling, “Pharmacokinetics Processes and Mathematics,” ACS Monograph 185 (1986). An even more preferred embodiment of the present invention is one for which the relative bioavailability of the test composition is at least 1.25-fold relative to both the first control composition and the second control composition. [0095]
  • Alternatively, in another separate aspect, the compositions comprising an amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provide more regular absorption. In this aspect, the compositions provide a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio that is near 1.0. By “fed/fasted bioavailability ratio” is meant the AUC in the blood provided by a composition dosed to a subject in the fed state, divided by the AUC in the blood provided by the same composition dosed to a subject in the fasted state. By “subject in the fed state” is meant a subject who has eaten a Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-recommended standard high fat breakfast within a period of twenty minutes, and then ingested (i.e., swallowed) the test dosage form essentially immediately thereafter. A standard high-fat breakfast consists of, for example, two eggs fried in one tablespoon of butter, two strips of bacon, six ounces of hash brown potatoes, two pieces of toast with two teaspoons of butter and two pats of jelly, and eight ounces of whole milk. This standard high-fat breakfast contains approximately 964 calories, 54% supplied as fat (58 gm) and 12% supplied as protein, calculated using the monograph “Nutritive Value of Foods”, U.S. Department of Agriculture Home and Garden Bulletin Number 72. Additional food can also be consumed within the twenty-minute period and the subject still qualifies as “fed”. A “subject in the fasted state” for purposes of definition is one who has not eaten for at least eight hours, typically overnight, prior to ingestion of the dosage form. [0096]
  • Thus, a preferred composition of the present invention comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material provides a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio of from 0.5 to 2.0. Preferably, the compositions provide a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio of from 0.67 to 1.5, and more preferably of from 0.8 to 1.25. Preferably, the composition of the present invention provides a fed/fasted bioavailability ratio that is closer to 1 than at least one of the first control compositions and the second composition, more preferably both compositions. [0097]
  • Alternatively, the concentration-enhancement provided by the compositions of the present invention may be determined in in vitro dissolution tests in an appropriate use environment. It has been determined that enhanced drug concentration in in vitro dissolution tests in PBS solution is a good indicator of in vivo performance and bioavailability. By “PBS solution” is meant an aqueous solution comprising 20 mM sodium phosphate (Na[0098] 2HPO4), 47 mM potassium phosphate (KH2PO4), 87 mM NaCl, and 0.2 mM KCl, adjusted to pH 6.5 with NaOH. In particular, a composition of the present invention may be dissolution-tested by adding it to PBS solution and agitating to promote dissolution. A composition of the invention is one which meets the criteria set out below when dosed to PBS solution.
  • In one aspect, the compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material, following introduction to an aqueous use environment, provide a concentration of “highly mobile” drug that is at least 2-fold the concentration of highly mobile drug provided by either the first control composition or the second control composition. Preferably, the concentration of highly mobile drug provided by the composition is at least 3-fold, more preferably at least 4-fold the concentration of highly mobile drug provided by either the first control composition or the second control composition. Preferred embodiments meet these criteria with both the first control composition and the second control composition. [0099]
  • By “highly mobile” is meant drug that is present either as free drug or in a lipophilic microphase. Drug that is highly mobile may be quantified using analytical techniques capable of measuring the concentration of drug in solution that is not in the form of polymer/drug assemblies or in precipitate. For example, a nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) technique may be used, since the NMR measurement only yields a well-resolved signal for species that are sufficiently small or mobile that they may rapidly rotate. In particular, the NMR signal has been found to be proportional to the amount of highly mobile drug; that is, free drug and any drug that may be present in a mobile, solvated non-aggregated state such as in lipophilic microphases but not drug present in large polymer/drug assemblies. Highly mobile drug may also be quantified through permeation analysis in which the rate of drug transport through a dialysis or other suitable membrane is proportional to the free drug concentration. [0100]
  • Alternatively, the compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material provide concentration enhancement by reducing the mass of precipitate formed in the use environment relative to the control composition. Reducing the mass of precipitate results in an increase in the amount of drug present in drug forms that are more labile and mobile, resulting in an increase in relative bioavailability. As used herein, the “precipitate ratio” is defined as the mass of drug present in the precipitate obtained when a first control composition (e.g., the solid amorphous dispersion alone) is administered to an aqueous use environment divided by the mass of drug present in the precipitate obtained when a test composition comprising the solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is administered to an equivalent amount of the same use environment. Thus, if 30 mg of drug is present in the precipitate formed when a control composition is administered to a test medium and 20 mg of drug is present in the precipitate formed when a test composition is administered to the same test medium, the precipitate ratio is equal to 1.5 (30/20). The compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material, following introduction to an aqueous environment of use, provide a precipitate ratio that is at least 1.25 relative to the first control composition previously described. Preferably, the composition of the present invention provides a precipitate ratio that is at least 2-fold, more preferably at least 3-fold relative to the control composition. [0101]
  • The amount of drug present in precipitate may be determined by any analytical technique that can quantitatively make such a determination. In one method, the amount of drug present in precipitate is determined by subtracting the total dissolved drug concentration from the theoretical concentration of drug if all of the drug added to the test medium had dissolved. As used herein, the term “total dissolved drug” refers to the total amount of drug dissolved in the aqueous solution, and includes drug present in the form of free drug, micelles, lipophilic microphases and polymer/drug assemblies. Specifically, this means that total dissolved drug may be determined by separating out any undissolved drug by centrifugation or filtration and then measuring the amount of drug remaining in the supernatant or filtrate. Total dissolved drug is typically taken as that material that either passes a 0.45 μm syringe filter or, alternatively, the material that remains in the supernatant following centrifugation. Filtration can be conducted using a 13 mm, 0.45 μm polyvinylidine difluoride syringe filter sold by Scientific Resources under the trademark TITAN®. Centrifugation is typically carried out in a polypropylene microcentrifuge tube by centrifuging at 13,000 G for 60 seconds. Other similar filtration or centrifugation methods can be employed and useful results obtained. For example, using other types of microfilters may yield values somewhat higher or lower (≈10-40%) than that obtained with the filter specified above but will still allow identification of preferred compositions. [0102]
  • Alternatively, drug in precipitate may be determined by collecting the solids obtained upon centrifugation or filtration of the aqueous solution, dissolution of the solids in an appropriate solvent, such as methanol, dimethylsulfoxide, or dimethylacetamide, and then analyzing for the drug using any quantitative analytical technique such as HPLC or NMR. [0103]
  • In another alternative aspect, the composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase forming material may provide a Maximum total dissolved Drug Concentration (MDC) that is at least 1.25-fold the MDC of either the first control composition or the second control composition. In other words, if the MDC provided by either control composition is 100 μg/mL, then a composition comprising a dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material provides an MDC of at least 125 μg/mL. More preferably, the MDC of drug achieved with the compositions of the present invention are at least 2-fold, and even more preferably at least 3-fold, that of either control composition. To facilitate testing, the maximum drug concentration may be taken as the maximum concentration achieved within 90 to 180 minutes following administration of the drug. Preferred compositions meet these criteria for both the first control composition and the second control composition. [0104]
  • Alternatively, the compositions comprising a dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material may provide in an aqueous use environment a total dissolved drug concentration versus time Area Under The Curve (AUC), for any period of at least 90 minutes between the time of introduction into the use environment and about 270 minutes following introduction to the use environment that is at least 1.25-fold that of either the first control composition or the second control composition. More preferably, the AUC achieved with the compositions of the present invention are at least 2-fold and more preferably at least 3-fold that of either control composition. Preferred compositions meet these criteria for both the first control composition and the second control composition. [0105]
  • In a particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention, the inventors have found that certain compositions provide a surprisingly “synergistic enhancement” in the various concentration and bioavailability criteria described above. The “synergistic enhancement” is determined by comparing the performance of the test composition of solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material to a “third control composition.” The third control composition consists essentially of the undispersed drug alone in its thermodynamically lowest energy state, typically the most stable crystalline form or its amorphous form if a crystalline form is unknown. Preferred compositions of solid amorphous dispersions of drug and polymer and lipophilic microphase-forming material exhibit synergistic enhancement by performing better than would be expected by simply adding the enhancement provided by a dispersion with the enhancement provided by the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0106]
  • To determine synergy, it is necessary to determine the performance of the first control composition, the second control composition, and the third control composition either in in vivo or in in vitro dissolution tests. The relative enhancement of the first control composition (e.g., the solid amorphous dispersion but with no lipophilic microphase-forming material) is determined with respect to the third control composition. For example, if the first control composition provides an AUC[0107] 90 (that is, the AUC obtained during the first 90 minutes following introduction of the composition to a use environment) of 20,000 min*μg/ml and the third control composition provides an AUC90 of 1,000 min*μg/ml, the first control composition has a relative enhancement of 20-fold.
  • Likewise, the relative enhancement of the second control composition (e.g., the undispersed crystalline drug with lipophilic microphase-forming material but no concentration-enhancing polymer) is determined with respect to the third control composition. For example, if the second control composition provides an AUC[0108] 90 of 40,000 min*μg/mi and the third control composition provides an AUC90 of 1,000 min*μg/ml, the second control composition has a relative enhancement of 40-fold.
  • Compositions of the present invention provide synergistic enhancement when the relative enhancement provided by the test composition compared with the third control composition is greater than the sum of the relative enhancement provided by the first control composition and the relative enhancement provided by second control composition. Returning to the examples described above, if the first control composition provided a relative enhancement of 20-fold, and the second control composition~provided a relative enhancement of 40-fold, the sum of their relative enhancements would be 60-fold. Thus, a test composition provides synergistic enhancement when it provides a relative enhancement of greater than 60-fold compared with the third control composition. [0109]
  • The synergistic enhancement may also be determined by comparing the relative bioavailability of the test composition, first control composition, and second control composition relative to the third control composition. Synergistic enhancement would be shown where the relative bioavailability of the test composition is greater than the sum of the relative bioavailability of the first control composition and the relative bioavailability of the second control composition. For example, if the first control composition provides a relative bioavailability of 1.5 with respect to the third control composition, and the second control composition provides a relative bioavailability of 2.0 with respect to the third control composition, the test composition shows synergistic enhancement when it has a relative bioavailability relative to the third control composition greater than 3.5. [0110]
  • In particular, the inventors have noted that synergistic enhancements in concentration are often obtained by compositions in which the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed, along with the drug, in the concentration-enhancing polymer. Such compositions are highly preferred. [0111]
  • Low-Solubility Drugs [0112]
  • The drug is a “low-solubility drug,” meaning that the drug may be either “substantially water-insoluble,” which means that the drug has a minimum aqueous solubility at physiologically relevant pH (e.g., pH 1-8) of less than 0.01 mg/mL, “sparingly water-soluble,” that is, has an aqueous solubility up to about 1 to 2 mg/mL, or even low to moderate aqueous-solubility, having an aqueous-solubility from about 1 mg/mL to as high as about 20 to 40 mg/mL. In general, it may be said that the drug has a dose-to-aqueous solubility ratio greater than 10 mL, and more typically greater than 100 mL, where the drug solubility (mg/mL) is the minimum value observed in any physiologically relevant aqueous solution (e.g., those with pH values between 1 and 8) including USP simulated gastric and intestinal buffers, and dose is in mg. The dose-to-aqueous-solubility-ratio may be determined by simply dividing the dose (in mg) by the aqueous solubility (in mg/mL). [0113]
  • The use of the lipophilic microphase-forming material works particularly well for very low solubility drugs. Thus, the invention finds particular utility where the drug has a solubility of less than 100 μg/ml, and even greater utility where the solubility is less than 10 μg/ml. [0114]
  • In addition, the invention finds utility when the drug has a relatively high absorption rate constant. By “absorption rate constant” is meant a constant that describes the rate at which the drug is moved from the site of administration (e.g., the GI tract of an animal) to the extra-cellular compartment of the body. Absorption rate constants are generally described by zero-order or first-order models. See for example, Remington's [0115] The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Ed (2000). The invention finds particular utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.005 min−1, more utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.01 min−1, and even more utility when the drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.03 min−1 or higher.
  • Preferred classes of drugs include, but are not limited to, antihypertensives, antianxiety agents, anticlotting agents, anticonvulsants, blood glucose-lowering agents, decongestants, antihistamines, antitussives, antineoplastics, beta blockers, anti-inflammatories, antipsychotic agents, cognitive enhancers, anti-atherosclerotic agents, cholesterol-reducing agents, antiobesity agents, autoimmune disorder agents, anti-impotence agents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, hypnotic agents, anti-Parkinsonism agents, anti-Alzheimer's disease agents, antibiotics, anti-depressants, and antiviral agents, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, and cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors. [0116]
  • Each named drug should be understood to include the neutral form of the drug, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, as well as prodrugs. Specific examples of antihypertensives include prazosin, nifedipine, amlodipine besylate, trimazosin and doxazosin; specific examples of a blood glucose-lowering agent are glipizide and chlorpropamide; a specific example of an anti-impotence agent is sildenafil and sildenafil citrate; specific examples of antineoplastics include chlorambucil, lomustine and echinomycin; a specific example of an imidazole-type antineoplastic is tubulazole; a specific example of an anti-hypercholesterolemic is atorvastatin calcium; specific examples of anxiolytics include hydroxyzine hydrochloride and doxepin hydrochloride; specific examples of anti-inflammatory agents include betamethasone, prednisolone, aspirin, piroxicam, valdecoxib, carprofen, celecoxib, flurbiprofen and (+)-N-{4-[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenoxy]-2-cyclopenten-1-yl}-N-hyroxyurea; a specific example of a barbiturate is phenobarbital; specific examples of antivirals include acyclovir, nelfinavir, and virazole; specific examples of vitamins/nutritional agents include retinol and vitamin E; specific examples of beta blockers include timolol and nadolol; a specific example of an emetic is apomorphine; specific examples of a diuretic include chlorthalidone and spironolactone; a specific example of an anticoagulant is dicumarol; specific examples of cardiotonics include digoxin and digitoxin; specific examples of androgens include 17-methyltestosterone and testosterone; a specific example of a mineral corticoid is desoxycorticosterone; a specific example of a steroidal hypnotic/anesthetic is alfaxalone; specific examples of anabolic agents include fluoxymesterone and methanstenolone; specific examples of antidepression agents include sulpiride, [3,6-dimethyl-2-(2,4,6-trimethyl-phenoxy)-pyridin-4-yl]-(1-ethylpropyl)-amine, 3,5-dimethyl-4-(3′-pentoxy)-2-(2′,4′,6′-trimethylphenoxy)pyridine, pyroxidine, fluoxetine, paroxetine, venlafaxine and sertraline; specific examples of antibiotics include carbenicillin indanylsodium, bacampicillin hydrochloride, troleandomycin, doxycyline hyclate, ampicillin and penicillin G; specific examples of anti-infectives include benzalkonium chloride and chlorhexidine; specific examples of coronary vasodilators include nitroglycerin and mioflazine; a specific example of a hypnotic is etomidate; specific examples of carbonic anhydrase inhibitors include acetazolamide and chlorzolamide; specific examples of antifungals include econazole, terconazole, fluconazole, voriconazole, and griseofulvin; a specific example of an antiprotozoal is metronidazole; specific examples of anthelmintic agents include thiabendazole and oxfendazole and morantel; specific examples of antihistamines include astemizole, levocabastine, cetirizine, decarboethoxyloratadine and cinnarizine; specific examples of antipsychotics include ziprasidone, olanzepine, thiothixene hydrochloride, fluspirilene, risperidone and penfluridole; specific examples of gastrointestinal agents include loperamide and cisapride; specific examples of serotonin antagonists include ketanserin and mianserin; a specific example of an anesthetic is lidocaine; a specific example of a hypoglycemic agent is acetohexamide; a specific example of an anti-emetic is dimenhydrinate; a specific example of an antibacterial is cotrimoxazole; a specific example of a dopaminergic agent is L-DOPA; specific examples of anti-Alzheimer's Disease agents are THA and donepezil; a specific example of an anti-ulcer agent/H2 antagonist is famotidine; specific examples of sedative/hypnotic agents include chlordiazepoxide and triazolam; a specific example of a vasodilator is alprostadil; a specific example of a platelet inhibitor is prostacyclin; specific examples of ACE inhibitor/antihypertensive agents include enalaprilic acid, quinapril, and lisinopril; specific examples of tetracycline antibiotics include oxytetracycline and minocycline; specific examples of macrolide antibiotics include erythromycin, clarithromycin, and spiramycin; a specific example of an azalide antibiotic is azithromycin; specific examples of glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors include [R-(R*S*)]-5-chloro-N-[2-hydroxy-3-{methoxymethylamino}-3-oxo-1-(phenylmethyl)propyl-1H-indole-2-carboxamide and 5-chloro-1H-indole-2-carboxylic acid [(1S)-benzyl-(2R)-hydroxy-3-((3R,4S)-dihydroxy-pyrrolidin-1-yl-)-3-oxypropyl]amide; and specific examples of cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors include [2R,4S]-4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-1-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester, [2R,4S]-4-[3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-1-carboxylic acid ethyl ester, and [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-1-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester. [0117]
  • Concentration-Enhancing Polymers [0118]
  • The composition also includes a concentration-enhancing polymer. By “concentration-enhancing” is meant a polymer present in a sufficient amount so that the dispersion provides, at a minimum, either improved AUC, maximum drug concentration, or relative bioavailability relative to a control consisting of an equivalent amount of crystalline drug but with no concentration-enhancing polymer. (Concentration enhancement may be evaluated as described above, except that the dispersion would be the test composition and crystalline drug without any polymer present would be the control composition). Concentration-enhancing polymers should be pharmaceutically acceptable, and should have at least some solubility in aqueous solution at physiologically relevant pHs (e.g., 1-8). Almost any neutral or ionizable polymer that has an aqueous-solubility of at least 0.1 mg/mL over at least a portion of the pH range of 1-8 may be suitable. [0119]
  • It is preferred that the concentration-enhancing polymer be “amphiphilic” in nature, meaning that the polymer has hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions. Amphiphilic polymers are preferred because it is believed that such polymers tend to have relatively strong interactions with the drug and may promote the formation of various types of polymer/drug assemblies in solution. [0120]
  • A particularly preferred class of amphiphilic polymers are those that are ionizable, the ionizable portions of such polymers, when ionized, constituting at least a portion of the hydrophilic portions of the polymer. For example, while not wishing to be bound by a particular theory, such polymer/drug assemblies may comprise hydrophobic drug clusters surrounded by the concentration-enhancing polymer with the polymer's hydrophobic regions turned inward towards the drug and the hydrophilic regions of the polymer turned outward toward the aqueous environment. Alternatively, depending on the specific chemical nature of the drug, the ionized functional groups of the polymer may associate, for example, via ion pairing or hydrogen bonds, with ionic or polar groups of the drug. In the case of ionizable polymers, the hydrophilic regions of the polymer would include the ionized functional groups. In addition, the repulsion of the like charges of the ionized groups of such polymers (where the polymer is ionizable) may serve to limit the size of the polymer/drug assemblies to the nanometer or submicron scale. Such drug/concentration-enhancing polymer assemblies in solution may well resemble charged polymeric micellar-like structures. In any case, regardless of the mechanism of action, the inventors have observed that such amphiphilic polymers, particularly ionizable cellulosic polymers such as those listed below, have been shown to interact with drug so as to maintain a higher concentration of drug in an aqueous use environment. [0121]
  • One class of polymers suitable for use with the present invention comprises non-ionizable (neutral) non-cellulosic polymers. Exemplary polymers include: vinyl polymers and copolymers having at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, alkylacyloxy, and cyclicamido; polyvinyl alcohols that have at least a portion of their repeat units in the unhydrolyzed (vinyl acetate) form; polyvinyl alcohol polyvinyl acetate copolymers; polyvinyl pyrrolidone; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers, also known as poloxamers; and polyethylene polyvinyl alcohol copolymers. [0122]
  • A preferred class of neutral non-cellulosic polymers comprises vinyl copolymers of at least one hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat unit and at least one hydrophobic, alkyl- or aryl-containing repeat unit. Such neutral vinyl copolymers are termed “amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers.” Amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers are believed to provide high concentration enhancements due to the amphiphilicity of these copolymers which provide both sufficient hydrophobic groups to interact with the hydrophobic, low-solubility drugs and also sufficient hydrophilic groups to have sufficient aqueous solubility for good dissolution. The copolymeric structure of the amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers also allows their hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity to be adjusted to maximize performance with a specific low-solubility drug. [0123]
  • The preferred copolymers have the general structure: [0124]
    Figure US20030228358A1-20031211-C00001
  • where A and B represent “hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing” and “hydrophobic” substituents, respectively, and n and m represent the average number of hydrophilic vinyl repeat units and average number of hydrophobic vinyl repeat units respectively per polymer molecule. Copolymers may be block copolymers, random copolymers or they may have structures anywhere between these two extremes. The sum of n and m is generally from about 50 to about 20,000 and therefore the polymers have molecular weights from about 2,500 to about 1,000,000 daltons. [0125]
  • The hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat units, “A,” may simply be hydroxyl (—OH) or it may be any short-chain, 1 to 6 carbon, alkyl with one or more hydroxyls attached thereto. The hydroxyl-substituted alkyl may be attached to the vinyl backbone via carbon-carbon or ether linkages. Thus exemplary “A” structures include, in addition to hydroxyl itself, hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, hydroxymethoxy, hydroxyethoxy and hydroxypropoxy. [0126]
  • The hydrophobic substituent, “B,” may simply be: hydrogen (—H), in which case the hydrophobic repeat unit is ethylene; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via a carbon-carbon bond such as methyl, ethyl or phenyl; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via an ether linkage such as methoxy, ethoxy or phenoxy; an alkyl or aryl substituent with up to 12 carbons attached via an ester linkage such as acetate, propionate, butyrate or benzoate. The amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers of the present invention may be synthesized by any conventional method used to prepare substituted vinyl copolymers. Some substituted vinyl copolymers such as polyvinyl alcohol/polyvinyl acetate are well known and commercially available. [0127]
  • A particularly convenient subclass of amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers to synthesize are those where the hydrophobic substituent “B” comprises the hydrophilic substituent “A” to which an alkylate or arylate group is attached via an ester linkage to one or more of the hydroxyls of A. Such copolymers may be synthesized by first forming the homopolymer of the hydrophobic vinyl repeat unit having the substituent B, followed by hydrolysis of a portion of the ester groups to convert a portion of the hydrophobic repeat units to hydrophilic, hydroxyl-containing repeat units having the substituent A. For example, partial hydrolysis of the homopolymer, polyvinylbutyrate, yields the copolymer, vinylalcohol/vinylbutyrate copolymer for which A is hydroxyl (—OH) and B is butyrate (—OOC—CH[0128] 2—CH2—CH3).
  • For all types of copolymers, the value of n must be sufficiently large relative to the value of m that the resulting copolymer is at least partially water soluble. Although the value of the ratio, n/m varies depending on the identity of A and B, it is generally at least about 1 and more commonly about 2 or more. The ratio n/m can be as high as 200. When the copolymer is formed by hydrolysis of the hydrophobic homopolymer, the relative values of n and m are typically reported in “percent hydrolysis,” which is the fraction (expressed as a percent) of the total repeat units of the copolymer that are in the hydrolyzed or hydroxyl form. The percent hydrolysis, H, is given as [0129] H = 100 × ( n n + m )
    Figure US20030228358A1-20031211-M00002
  • Thus, vinylbutyrate/vinylalcohol copolymer (formed by hydrolysis of a portion of the butyrate groups) having a percent hydrolysis of 75% has an n/m ratio of 3. A particularly preferred family of amphiphilic hydroxyl-functional vinyl copolymers are those where A is hydroxyl and B is acetate. Such copolymers are termed vinylacetate/vinylalcohol copolymers. Some commercial grades are also sometimes referred to simply as polyvinylalcohol. However, the true homopolymer, polyvinylalcohol is not amphiphilic and is almost entirely water insoluble. Preferred vinylacetate/vinylalcohol copolymers are those where H is between about 67% and 99.5%, or n/m has a value between about 2 and 200. The preferred average molecular weight is between about 2500 and 1,000,000 daltons and more preferably between about 3000 and about 100,000 daltons. [0130]
  • Another class of polymers suitable for use with the present invention comprises ionizable non-cellulosic polymers. Exemplary polymers include: carboxylic acid-functionalized vinyl polymers, such as the carboxylic acid functionalized polymethacrylates and carboxylic acid functionalized polyacrylates such as the EUDRAGITS manufactured by Rohm Tech Inc., of Maiden, Mass.; amine-functionalized polyacrylates and polymethacrylates; proteins such as gelatin and albumin; and carboxylic acid functionalized starches such as starch glycolate. Non-cellulosic polymers that are amphiphilic are copolymers of a relatively hydrophilic and a relatively hydrophobic monomer. Examples include acrylate and methacrylate copolymers. Exemplary commercial grades of such copolymers include the EUDRAGITS, which are copolymers of methacrylates and acrylates. [0131]
  • A preferred class of polymers comprises ionizable and neutral (or non-ionizable) cellulosic polymers with at least one ester- and/or ether-linked substituent in which the polymer has a degree of substitution of at least 0.05 for each substituent. It should be noted that in the polymer nomenclature used herein, ether-linked substituents are recited prior to “cellulose” as the moiety attached to the ether group; for example, “ethylbenzoic acid cellulose” has ethoxybenzoic acid substituents. Analogously, ester-linked substituents are recited after “cellulose” as the carboxylate; for example, “cellulose phthalate” has one carboxylic acid of each phthalate moiety ester-linked to the polymer and the other carboxylic acid unreacted. [0132]
  • It should also be noted that a polymer name such as “cellulose acetate phthalate” (CAP) refers to any of the family of cellulosic polymers that have acetate and phthalate groups attached via ester linkages to a significant fraction of the cellulosic polymer's hydroxyl groups. Generally, the degree of substitution of each substituent group can range from 0.05 to 2.9 as long as the other criteria of the polymer are met. “Degree of substitution” refers to the average number of the three hydroxyls per saccharide repeat unit on the cellulose chain that have been substituted. For example, if all of the hydroxyls on the cellulose chain have been phthalate substituted, the phthalate degree of substitution is 3. Also included within each polymer family type are cellulosic polymers that have additional substituents added in relatively small amounts that do not substantially alter the performance of the polymer. [0133]
  • Amphiphilic cellulosics comprise polymers in which the parent cellulosic polymer has been substituted at any or all of the 3 hydroxyl groups present on each saccharide repeat unit with at least one relatively hydrophobic substituent. Hydrophobic substituents may be essentially any substituent that, if substituted to a high enough level or degree of substitution, can render the cellulosic polymer essentially aqueous insoluble. Examples of hydrophobic substituents include ether-linked alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.; or ester-linked alkyl groups such as acetate, propionate, butyrate, etc.; and ether- and/or ester-linked aryl groups such as phenyl, benzoate, or phenylate. Hydrophilic regions of the polymer can be either those portions that are relatively unsubstituted, since the unsubstituted hydroxyls are themselves relatively hydrophilic, or those regions that are substituted with hydrophilic substituents. Hydrophilic substituents include ether- or ester-linked nonionizable groups such as the hydroxy alkyl substituents hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, and the alkyl ether groups such as ethoxyethoxy or methoxyethoxy. Particularly preferred hydrophilic substituents are those that are ether- or ester-linked ionizable groups such as carboxylic acids, thiocarboxylic acids, substituted phenoxy groups, amines, phosphates or sulfonates. [0134]
  • One class of cellulosic polymers comprises neutral polymers, meaning that the polymers are substantially non-ionizable in aqueous solution. Such polymers contain non-ionizable substituents, which may be either ether-linked or ester-linked. Exemplary ether-linked non-ionizable substituents include: alkyl groups, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, etc.; hydroxy alkyl groups such as hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, etc.; and aryl groups such as phenyl. Exemplary ester-linked non-ionizable substituents include: alkyl groups, such as acetate, propionate, butyrate, etc.; and aryl groups such as phenylate. However, when aryl groups are included, the polymer may need to include a sufficient amount of a hydrophilic substituent so that the polymer has at least some water solubility at any physiologically relevant pH of from 1 to 8. [0135]
  • Exemplary non-ionizable (neutral) cellulosic polymers that may be used as the polymer include: hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate, and hydroxyethyl ethyl cellulose. [0136]
  • A preferred set of neutral cellulosic polymers are those that are amphiphilic. Exemplary polymers include hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose and hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate, where cellulosic repeat units that have relatively high numbers of methyl or acetate substituents relative to the unsubstituted hydroxyl or hydroxypropyl substituents constitute hydrophobic regions relative to other repeat units on the polymer. [0137]
  • A preferred class of cellulosic polymers comprises polymers that are at least partially ionizable at physiologically relevant pH and include at least one ionizable substituent, which may be either ether-linked or ester-linked. Exemplary ether-linked ionizable substituents include: carboxylic acids, such as acetic acid, propionic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, alkoxybenzoic acids such as ethoxybenzoic acid or propoxybenzoic acid, the various isomers of alkoxyphthalic acid such as ethoxyphthalic acid and ethoxyisophthalic acid, the various isomers of alkoxynicotinic acid such as ethoxynicotinic acid, and the various isomers of picolinic acid such as ethoxypicolinic acid, etc.; thiocarboxylic acids, such as thioacetic acid; substituted phenoxy groups, such as hydroxyphenoxy, etc.; amines, such as aminoethoxy, diethylaminoethoxy, trimethylaminoethoxy, etc.; phosphates, such as phosphate ethoxy; and sulfonates, such as sulphonate ethoxy. Exemplary ester linked ionizable substituents include: carboxylic acids, such as succinate, citrate, phthalate, terephthalate, isophthalate, trimellitate, and the various isomers of pyridinedicarboxylic acid, etc.; thiocarboxylic acids, such as thiosuccinate; substituted phenoxy groups, such as amino salicylic acid; amines, such as natural or synthetic amino acids, such as alanine or phenylalanine; phosphates, such as acetyl phosphate; and sulfonates, such as acetyl sulfonate. For aromatic-substituted polymers to also have the requisite aqueous solubility, it is also desirable that sufficient hydrophilic groups such as hydroxypropyl or carboxylic acid functional groups be attached to the polymer to render the polymer aqueous soluble at least at pH values where any ionizable groups are ionized. In some cases, the aromatic substituent may itself be ionizable, such as phthalate or trimellitate substituents. [0138]
  • Exemplary cellulosic polymers that are at least partially ionized at physiologically relevant pHs include: hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, ethyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate phthalate, cellulose propionate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose butyrate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, ethyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate succinate, cellulose propionate trimellitate, cellulose butyrate trimellitate, cellulose acetate terephthalate, cellulose acetate isophthalate, cellulose acetate pyridinedicarboxylate, salicylic acid cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl salicylic acid cellulose acetate, ethylbenzoic acid cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl ethylbenzoic acid cellulose acetate, ethyl phthalic acid cellulose acetate, ethyl nicotinic acid cellulose acetate, and ethyl picolinic acid cellulose acetate. [0139]
  • Exemplary cellulosic polymers that meet the definition of amphiphilic, having hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions include polymers such as cellulose acetate phthalate and cellulose acetate trimellitate where the cellulosic repeat units that have one or more acetate substituents are hydrophobic relative to those that have no acetate substituents or have one or more ionized phthalate or trimellitate substituents. [0140]
  • A particularly desirable subset of cellulosic ionizable polymers are those that possess both a carboxylic acid functional aromatic substituent and an alkylate substituent and thus are amphiphilic. Exemplary polymers include cellulose acetate phthalate, methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, ethyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxylpropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate phthalate succinate, cellulose propionate phthalate, hydroxypropyl cellulose butyrate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, ethyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate trimellitate succinate, cellulose propionate trimellitate, cellulose butyrate trimellitate, cellulose acetate terephthalate, cellulose acetate isophthalate, cellulose acetate pyridinedicarboxylate, salicylic acid cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl salicylic acid cellulose acetate, ethylbenzoic acid cellulose acetate, hydroxypropyl ethylbenzoic acid cellulose acetate, ethyl phthalic acid cellulose acetate, ethyl nicotinic acid cellulose acetate, and ethyl picolinic acid cellulose acetate. [0141]
  • Another particularly desirable subset of cellulosic ionizable polymers are those that possess a non-aromatic carboxylate substituent. Exemplary polymers include hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxypropyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose succinate, hydroxyethyl cellulose acetate succinate and carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose. Of these cellulosic polymers that are at least partially ionized at physiologically relevant pHs, the inventors have found the following to be most preferred: hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate and carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose. The most preferred is hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate. [0142]
  • Another preferred class of polymers consists of neutralized acidic polymers. By “neutralized acidic polymer” is meant any acidic polymer for which a significant fraction of the “acidic moieties” or “acidic substituents” have been “neutralized”; that is, exist in their deprotonated form. By “neutralized acidic cellulosic polymers” is meant any cellulosic “acidic polymer” for which a significant fraction of the “acidic moieties” or “acidic substituents” have been “neutralized.” By “acidic polymer” is meant any polymer that possesses a significant number of acidic moieties. In general, a significant number of acidic moieties would be greater than or equal to about 0.1 milliequivalents of acidic moieties per gram of polymer. “Acidic moieties” include any functional groups that are sufficiently acidic that, in contact with or dissolved in water, can at least partially donate a hydrogen cation to water and thus increase the hydrogen-ion concentration. This definition includes any functional group or “substituent,” as it is termed when the functional group is covalently attached to a polymer, that has a pK[0143] a of less than about 10. Exemplary classes of functional groups that are included in the above description include carboxylic acids, thiocarboxylic acids, phosphates, phenolic groups, and sulfonates. Such functional groups may make up the primary structure of the polymer such as for polyacrylic acid, but more generally are covalently attached to the backbone of the parent polymer and thus are termed “substituents.” Neutralized acidic polymers are described in more detail in commonly assigned copending provisional patent application U.S. Ser. No. 60/300,256 entitled “Pharmaceutical Compositions of Drugs and Neutralized Acidic Polymers” filed Jun. 22, 2001, the relevant disclosure of which is incorporated by reference.
  • The glass transition temperature of the dispersion is dependent on the glass transition temperatures of the materials comprising the dispersion. Since one of the primary materials used to form the dispersion is the concentration-enhancing polymer, and since the glass transition temperature of the drug is often relatively low, the concentration-enhancing polymer may be chosen so as to have a relatively high glass transition temperature. Thus, the polymer may have, when equilibrated with humid air having a relative humidity of about 50%, a glass transition temperature of at least 40° C., at least 70° C., or even greater than 100° C. [0144]
  • While specific polymers have been discussed as being suitable for use in the mixtures of the present invention, blends of such polymers may also be suitable. Thus, the term “concentration-enhancing polymer” is intended to include blends of polymers in addition to a single species of polymer. [0145]
  • Excipients and Dosage Forms [0146]
  • Although the key ingredient present in the compositions is simply the mixture of (1) the dispersion of drug and the concentration-enhancing polymer, and (2) the lipophilic microphase-forming material, the inclusion of other excipients in the composition may be useful. These excipients may be utilized in order to formulate the composition into tablets, capsules, suppositories, suspensions, powders for suspension, creams, transdermal patches, depots, and the like. The mixture may be added to other dosage form ingredients in essentially any manner that does not substantially alter the drug. The excipients may be either separate from the mixture and/or included within the mixture. [0147]
  • The addition of pH modifiers such as acids, bases, or buffers may be beneficial, retarding the dissolution of the composition (e.g., acids such as citric acid or succinic acid when the concentration-enhancing polymer is anionic) or, alternatively, enhancing the rate of dissolution of the composition (e.g., bases such as sodium acetate or amines when the polymer is anionic). [0148]
  • Conventional matrix materials, complexing agents, solubilizers, fillers, disintegrating agents (disintegrants), or binders may also be added as part of the composition itself or added by granulation via wet or mechanical or other means. These materials may comprise up to 90 wt % of the composition. [0149]
  • Examples of matrix materials, fillers, or diluents include lactose, mannitol, xylitol, microcrystalline cellulose, dibasic calcium phosphate (dihydrate and anhydrous), and starch. [0150]
  • Examples of disintegrants include sodium starch glycolate, sodium alginate, carboxy methyl cellulose sodium, methyl cellulose, and croscarmellose sodium, and crosslinked forms of polyvinyl pyrrolidone such as those sold under the trade name CROSPOVIDONE (available from BASF Corporation). [0151]
  • Examples of binders include methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, starch, and gums such as guar gum, and tragacanth. [0152]
  • Examples of lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, and stearic acid. [0153]
  • Examples of preservatives include sulfites (an antioxidant), benzalkonium chloride, methyl paraben, propyl paraben, benzyl alcohol and sodium benzoate. [0154]
  • Examples of suspending agents or thickeners include xanthan gum, starch, guar gum, sodium alginate, carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, polyacrylic acid, silica gel, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, and titanium dioxide. [0155]
  • Examples of anticaking agents or fillers include silicon oxide and lactose. [0156]
  • Examples of solubilizers include ethanol, propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol. [0157]
  • Other conventional excipients may be employed in the compositions of this invention, including those excipients well-known in the art. Generally, excipients such as pigments, lubricants, flavorants, and so forth may be used for customary purposes and in typical amounts without adversely affecting the properties of the compositions. These excipients may be utilized in order to formulate the composition into tablets, capsules, suspensions, powders for suspension, creams, transdermal patches, and the like. [0158]
  • In particular, solid dosage forms such as immediate release tablets, controlled release tablets, delayed release tablets, chewable tablets and analogous capsules containing solid material are a preferred embodiment of this invention. Preferred dosage forms of this type generally comprise from 10 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material up to 80 wt % lipophilic microphase-forming material as well as the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer, together with other optional excipients. [0159]
  • It is conventionally thought that because lipophilic microphase-forming material are typically either low melting point or low T[0160] g solids, or even liquids at room temperature, that they are not considered appropriate additives for such solid dosage forms except at low levels, typically less than about 5 wt % or less to promote wetting and dissolution of the tablet. However, the inventors have found that, contrary to such conventional wisdom, solid dosage forms with excellent properties can be made that have relatively high levels of lipophilic microphase-forming material. In order for such high lipophilic microphase-forming material levels to be utilized in such solid dosage forms, the inventors have found it desirable to adsorb at least a portion of the lipophilic microphase-forming material on a solid substrate or disperse the lipophilic microphase-forming material in a water soluble or water dispersible matrix. As mentioned earlier, appropriate adsorption substrates include materials such as silicon oxide, dibasic calcium phosphate, microcrystalline cellulose, and calcium silicate. Appropriate water soluble or water dispersible dispersion matrix materials include sugars such as sucrose and xylitol, organic acids such as citric acid or lactic acid, water soluble polymers such as polydextrose, polyethylene oxide, or dextrin. Particularly preferred dispersion matrix materials are the concentration-enhancing polymers previously described. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the lipophilic microphase-forming material is dispersed along with drug in the concentration-enhancing polymer. An added advantage of this embodiment, particularly when the lipophilic microphase-forming material is liquid at temperatures below about 50° C., is that relatively high levels of lipophilic microphase-forming material, up to about 50 wt % or in some cases even more, can often be added to the drug/polymer solid amorphous dispersion while still having the resulting material be a solid powder or granule at ambient conditions.
  • The compositions of the present invention may be delivered by a wide variety of routes, including, but not limited to, oral, nasal, rectal, vaginal, subcutaneous, intravenous, and pulmonary. Generally, the oral route is preferred. [0161]
  • Compositions of this invention may also be used in a wide variety of dosage forms for administration of drugs. Exemplary dosage forms are powders or granules that may be taken orally either dry or reconstituted by addition of water or other liquids to form a paste, slurry, suspension or solution; tablets; capsules; multiparticulates; and pills. Various additives may be mixed, ground, or granulated with the compositions of this invention to form a material suitable for the above dosage forms. In one preferred embodiment, the solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer is formulated as a dry powder and then, prior to administration, is dispersed in a vehicle that contains the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0162]
  • The compositions of the present invention may be formulated in various forms such that they are delivered as a suspension of particles in a liquid vehicle. Such suspensions may be formulated as a liquid or paste at the time of manufacture, or they may be formulated as a dry powder with a liquid, typically water, added at a later time but prior to oral administration. Such powders that are constituted into a suspension are often termed sachets or oral powder for constitution (OPC) formulations. Such dosage forms can be formulated and reconstituted via any known procedure. The simplest approach is to formulate the dosage form as a dry powder that is reconstituted by simply adding water and agitating. Alternatively, the dosage form may be formulated as a liquid and a dry powder that are combined and agitated to form the oral suspension. In yet another embodiment, the dosage form can be formulated as two powders which are reconstituted by first adding water to one powder to form a solution to which the second powder is combined with agitation to form the suspension. [0163]
  • Generally, it is preferred that the dispersion of drug be formulated for long-term storage in the dry state as this promotes the chemical and physical stability of the drug. [0164]
  • Yet another method to deliver the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material is to co-administer the dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material to an in vivo use environment. The solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic microphase-forming material may each be added separately to the in vivo use environment. Thus, when dosed orally, the dispersion may be taken orally prior to the lipophilic microphase-forming material, at the same time, or after the lipophilic microphase-forming material has been taken orally. In general, if administered separately to an in vivo use environment, the solid amorphous dispersion and the lipophilic microphase-forming material should be administered within 15 minutes of each other. [0165]
  • Since the present invention has an aspect that relates to the treatment of a condition or disorder by treatment with a combination of a polymer/drug solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material which may be co-administered separately, the invention also relates to combining separate pharmaceutical compositions in kit form. The kit comprises two separate pharmaceutical compositions: (1) a composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion of drug and concentration-enhancing polymer; and (2) a composition comprising a lipophilic microphase-forming material. The amounts of (1) and (2) are such that, when co-administered separately, the condition or disorder is treated and/or remediated. The kit comprises a container for containing the separate compositions such as a divided bottle or a divided foil packet, wherein each compartment contains a plurality of dosage forms (e.g., tablets) comprising (1) or (2). Alternatively, rather than separating the active ingredient-containing dosage forms, the kit may contain separate compartments each of which contains a whole dosage which in turn comprises separate dosage forms. An example of this type of kit is a blister pack wherein each individual blister contains two (or more) tablets, one (or more) tablet(s) comprising pharmaceutical composition (1), and the second (or more) tablet(s) comprising pharmaceutical composition (2). Typically the kit comprises directions for the administration of the separate components. The kit form is particularly advantageous when the separate components are preferably administered in different dosage forms (e.g., oral and parenteral), are administered at different dosage intervals, or when titration of the individual components of the combination is desired by the prescribing physician. In the case of the instant invention a kit therefore comprises [0166]
  • (1) a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a solid amorphous dispersion of a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer, in a first dosage form; [0167]
  • (2) a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a lipophilic microphase-forming material, in a second dosage form; and [0168]
  • (3) a container for containing said first and second dosage forms. [0169]
  • An example of such a kit, alluded to above, is a so-called blister pack. Blister packs are well known in the packaging industry and are widely used for the packaging of pharmaceutical unit dosage forms such as tablets, capsules, and the like. Blister packs generally consist of a sheet of relatively stiff material covered with a foil of a preferably transparent plastic material. During the packaging process recesses are formed in the plastic foil. The recesses have the size and shape of the tablets or capsules to be packed. Next, the tablets or capsules are placed in the recesses and the sheet of relatively stiff material is sealed against the plastic foil at the face of the foil which is opposite from the direction in which the recesses were formed. As a result, the tablets or capsules are sealed in the recesses between the plastic foil and the sheet. Preferably, the strength of the sheet is such that the tablets or capsules can be removed from the blister pack by manually applying pressure on the recesses whereby an opening is formed in the sheet at the place of the recess. Tablet(s) or capsule(s) can then be removed via said opening. [0170]
  • It may be desirable to provide a memory aid on the kit, e.g., in the form of numbers next to the tablets or capsules whereby the numbers correspond with the days of the regimen during which the tablets or capsules so specified should be ingested. Another example of such a memory aid is a calendar printed on the card, e.g., as follows “First Week, Monday, Tuesday, . . . etc. . . . Second Week, Monday, Tuesday, . . . ”, etc. Other variations of memory aids will be readily apparent. A “daily dose” can be a single tablet or capsule or several pills or capsules to be taken on a given day. Also a daily dose of the first compound can consist of one tablet or capsule while a daily dose of the second compound can consist of several tablets or capsules and vice versa. The memory aid should reflect this. [0171]
  • Compositions of the present invention may be used to treat any condition which is subject to treatment by administering a drug. [0172]
  • Other features and embodiments of the invention will become apparent from the following examples which are given for illustration of the invention rather than for limiting its intended scope.[0173]
  • EXAMPLES
  • Dispersions 1-12 [0174]
  • Solid amorphous dispersions of drugs and various concentration-enhancing polymers were prepared by spray-drying each solution of drug and polymer, using either a Niro PSD-1 spray drier or a “mini” spray drier. For Dispersions 1, 2, 9, 10, 11, and 12 the drug was [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-1-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (“Drug 1”). For Dispersions 3 and 4, the drug was the hydrochloride salt form of ziprazidone (“Drug 2A”), while for Dispersion 5, the drug was the free base form of ziprazidone (“Drug 2B”). For Dispersions 6 and 7, the drug was 2-phenanthrenecarboxamide, 4b,5,6,7,8,8a,9,10-octahydro-7-hydroxy-N-[(2-methyl-3-pyridinyl)methyl]-4b-(phenylmethyl)-7-(3,3,3-trifluoropropyl)-, (4bS,7S,8aR) (“Drug 3”). For Dispersion 8, the drug was 5-chloro-1H-indole-2-carboxylic acid [(1S)-benzyl -3-((3R, 4S)-dihydroxypyrroldin-1-yl-)-(2R)-hydroxy-3-oxypropyl] amide (“Drug 4”). [0175]
  • For Dispersion 1, an amorphous dispersion of Drug 1 and HPMCAS-MF was prepared using a Niro PSD-1 spray drier. First, a spray solution was formed containing 2.5 wt % Drug 1, 7.5 wt % HPMCAS-MF, and 90% acetone. The solution was spray-dried by directing a Niro two-fluid external-mix spray nozzle at 2.7 bar with a feed rate of 190 g/min into the stainless-steel chamber of a Niro PSD-1 spray-dryer, using nitrogen as the drying gas, maintained at a temperature of 137° C. at the inlet; the drying gas and evaporated solvent exited the drier at 49° C. [0176]
  • The resulting solid amorphous dispersion was collected via a cyclone and then dried in a Gruenberg solvent tray-drier by spreading the spray-dried particles onto polyethylene-lined trays to a depth of not more than 1 cm and then drying them at 40° C. for 25 hours. After drying, Dispersion 1 contained 25 wt % Drug 1. The mean diameter of the dispersion particles was 15 □m. [0177]
  • Dispersions 2, 3, 8, 10, and 12 were prepared using the same process as described for Dispersion 1, with the exception of the variables noted in Table 1, which summarizes the process conditions. Dispersion 12 was spray-dried using a Niro PSD-4 spray drier and a pressure nozzle (Delvan SDX111 (SA-38)). [0178]
    TABLE 1
    Drug Polymer Solvent Nozzle Feed
    Disp Drug Mass Mass Mass Pressure Rate Tin Tout
    No. No. (g) Polymer (g) Solvent (g) (bar) (g/min) (° C.) (° C.)
    1 1 8 HPMCAS-MF 24 Acetone 288 2.7 190 137 49
    2 1 40 HPMCAS-MF 120.4 Acetone 840 2.7 200 139 50
    3 2A 1 HPMCAS-MF 9 Methanol 490 7.7 50 120 60
    8 4 150 HPMCAS-MF 150 Acetone 11,700 1.9 200 180 70
    10 1 4.2 CMEC 7.8 Acetone 138 6.7 200 110 45
    12 1 144 HPMCAS-MG 432 Acetone 3024 48 1667 110 45
  • For Dispersion 4, an amorphous dispersion of ziprazidone, in the hydrochloride salt form, (“Drug 2A”), was prepared using the mini spray drier. The spray solution consisted of 0.14 wt % Drug 2A, 0.14 wt % HPMCAS-HF, and 99.72 wt % methanol. The solution was pumped into a “mini” spray-drying apparatus via a Cole Parmer 74900 series, rate-controlling syringe pump at a rate of 1.3 mL/min. The drug/polymer solution was atomized through a Spraying Systems Co. two-fluid nozzle, Module No. SU1A using a heated stream of nitrogen (100° C.). The spray solution was sprayed into an 11-cm diameter stainless steel chamber. The resulting solid amorphous dispersion was collected on filter paper, dried under vacuum, and stored in a desiccator. After drying, Dispersion 4 contained 50 wt % Drug 2 form A. [0179]
  • Dispersions 5, 6, 7, 9 and 11 were prepared using the same process as described for Dispersion 4, with the exception of the variables noted in Table 2, which summarizes the process conditions. Note that for Dispersion 11 the lipophilic microphase-forming material (Capmul MCM) was included in the solvent solution used to form the dispersion. [0180]
    TABLE 2
    Drug Polymer Solvent Feed
    Disp. Drug Mass Mass Mass Rate Tin
    No. No. (mg) Polymer (mg) Solvent (g) (mL/min) (° C.)
    4 2A 500.2 HPMCAS-HF 500.2 Methanol 356.0 1.3 100
    5 2B 500.2 HPMCAS-HF 500.1 Methanol 166.0 1.3 100
    6 3 25.4 CAP 225.6 Acetone 25 1.3 100
    7 3 25.3 HPMCAS-MF 225.0 Acetone 25 1.3 100
    9 1 3.0 HPMC 27 MeOH/Acetone 10 1.3 100
    1/1
    11 1 40 HPMCAS-MF 120 Acetone 12 1.0 90
  • Table 3 summarizes the various dispersions used in the Examples which follow. [0181]
    TABLE 3
    Drug Conc. Spray-drier Used
    Dispersion Drug in Dispersion to Prepare
    No. No. (active, wt %) Polymer Dispersion
    1 1 25 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1
    2 1 25 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1
    3 2A 10 HPMCAS-HF Niro PSD-1
    4 2A 50 HPMCAS-HF Mini
    5 2B 50 HPMCAS-HF Mini
    6 3 10 CAP Mini
    7 3 10 HPMCAS-MF Mini
    8 4 50 HPMCAS-MF Niro PSD-1
    9 1 10 HPMC Mini
    10 1 35 CMEC Niro PSD-1
    11 1 20 HPMCAS-MF Mini
    12 1 25 HPMCAS-MG Niro PSD-1
  • Example 1
  • In this example, a method is used to screen a candidate lipophilic microphase-forming material for suitability in providing concentration-enhancement. A simulated intestinal buffer solution was prepared by dissolving 6.8 g of potassium phosphate monobasic in 750 mL of deionized water with 85 mL 0.2 M sodium hydroxide. Water was added for a final volume of 1 L. The pH was adjusted to 6.8±0.1 using 0.2 M sodium hydroxide. [0182]
  • Next, a lipophilic microphase-forming material was added to the buffer solution. 0.069 wt % polyethoxylated castor oil (CREMOPHOR RH40) and 0.031 wt % glyceryl mono- and di-caprylate (CAPMUL MCM) were added to the buffer to form the lipophilic microphase. 250 mL of the resulting solution was then added to a vessel in a VanKel dissolution testing apparatus with automatic sampling. The solution temperature was maintained at 37° C., and stirred with a paddle speed of 50 rpm. [0183]
  • After equilibration to 37° C., 120.3 mg of Dispersion 1 was added to the buffer containing the lipophilic microphase, resulting in a theoretical Drug 1 concentration of 120 μg/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved. Samples were collected at 5, 15, 20, 35, 45, 60, 75, 90, 120, 180 and 1200 minutes, centrifuged for 1 minute at 13,000 G, and then analyzed by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Symmetry C[0184] 8 column. The mobile phase consisted of 0.2 vol % H3PO4 (in water)/methanol in the ratio of 15/85 vol/vol. Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 256 nm to the absorbance of Drug 1 standards. Drug measured by HPLC includes free drug in solution, drug present in drug/polymer aggregates, and drug in the lipophilic microphase. The results are shown in Table 4.
  • Control 1 [0185]
  • Control 1 consisted of dissolution of Dispersion 1 in intestinal buffer without the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0186]
    TABLE 4
    Drug 1
    Example Time Concentration AUC
    No. Dispersion (min) (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
    1 1 0 0 0
    5 42 100
    15 75 700
    20 85 1,100
    35 86 2,400
    45 87 3,200
    60 84 4,500
    75 85 5,800
    90 81 7,000
    120 78 9,400
    180 74 14,000
    1200 68 86,100
    Control 1 1 0 0 0
    5 13 0
    15 21 200
    20 29 300
    35 39 800
    45 43 1,300
    60 45 1,900
    75 55 2,700
    90 59 3,500
    120 64 5,400
    180 59 9,000
    1200 40 59,400
  • The concentrations of drug obtained in these samples were used to determine the maximum concentration of drug (“C[0187] max180”) and the area under the concentration-versus-time curve (“AUC180”) during the initial one hundred eighty minutes. The results are shown in Table 5.
    TABLE 5
    Lipophile/ AUC180
    Exp. Dis- Lipophilic Drug Cmax180 (min*μg/
    No. persion Drug Microphase Ratio (μg/mL) mL)
    1 1 1 Cremophor 8.3 87 14,000
    & Capmul
    Control 1 1 none 64  9,000
    1
  • As can be seen from the data, the test performed with the lipophilic microphase-forming material (Example 1) provided a C[0188] max180 that was 1.4-fold that of the control, and an AUC180 that was 1.6-fold that of the control, indicating that the lipophilic microphase-forming material is suitable for use in the invention.
  • Example 2
  • This example demonstrates that the lipophilic microphase forming material results in a significant amount of drug being present in lipophilic microphases and decreases the amount of drug present as precipitate. For Example 2, 4.0 mg of Dispersion 2 was added to Eppendorf tubes (in duplicate) containing 1.0 mL of deuterated PBS with the following lipophilic microphase-forming material: 1.09 mg Cremophore RH40 and 0.50 mg Capmul MCM. The solution also contained 0.11 mg 3-(trimethylsilyl)propionic-2,2,3,3- d[0189] 4 acid, sodium salt (“TSP”; a deuterated NMR reference standard). Next, 10 μL of a 1.11 mg/mL 19F trifluoroacetic acid standard solution (“TFA”) was added to each tube. The solutions in the tubes were vortexed 1 minute, centrifuged 1 minute to remove bubbles, resuspended using a pipette, and transferred to an 8 mm NMR tube. Proton and 19F spectra were recorded for separate identical samples using a Varian Gemini 2000 NMR instrument. By comparing the drug NMR spectra to the TFA standard, these spectra were used to determine the total amount of Drug 1 present as free drug in solution and drug in the lipophilic microphase. Drug in polymer/drug assemblies was determined by subtracting the concentration of highly mobile drug from the concentration of total dissolved drug. Free drug and drug in the lipophilic microphase together are referred to as “highly mobile” drug.
  • The precipitate was analyzed by centrifuging the solution and decanting the supernatant. The pellet was dried, then dissolved in DMSO and analyzed by NMR. The proton spectra was used to measure the polymer:drug ratio, and the concentration of drug in the precipitate was calculated from standards. [0190]
  • HPLC was used to determine the amount of total dissolved drug in the supernatant following centrifugation. The drug observed by HPLC consisted of free drug in solution, drug present in polymer/drug assemblies, and drug in the lipophilic microphase. [0191]
  • The results of these tests were used to determine the amount of Drug 1 in precipitate, in highly mobile species, or in polymer/drug assemblies in a solution of Example 2. The results are shown in Table 6. [0192]
  • Control 2 [0193]
  • Control 2 consisted of Dispersion 2 in deuterated PBS without the lipophilic microphase. [0194]
    TABLE 6
    Drug in
    Highly Polymer/
    Lipophile/ Drug in Mobile Drug
    Exp. Lipophilic Drug Precipitate Drug Assemblies
    No. Dispersion Drug Microphase Ratio (μg/mL) (μg/mL) (μg/mL)
    2 2 1 Cremophor 1.59 50 400 550
    & Capmul
    Control 2 1 none 270 <3 730
    2
  • These data show that the composition of the present invention provided concentration enhancement over the control. Specifically, the concentration of drug that is highly mobile, meaning either present as free drug or present in lipophilic microphases, for Example 2 was at least 133-fold that provided by Control 2. In addition, the precipitate ratio was 5.4 (270/50). [0195]
  • Examples 3-8
  • These examples show concentration-enhancement provided by several candidate lipophilic microphase-forming materials. For each of Examples 3-8, Dispersion 2 was added to a solution containing a lipophilic microphase-forming material. Example 3 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with a mixture of sodium taurocholic acid and 1-palmitoyl-2-oleyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (“NaTC/POPC”; 4/1 wt/wt). Example 4 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Tween 80 and Capmul MCM (40/60 wt/wt). Example 5 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Capmul MCM (40/60 wt/wt). Example 6 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Capmul MCM (72/28 wt/wt). Example 7 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and a mixture of Cremophor RH40 and Arlacel 20 (75/25 wt/wt). Example 8 consisted of Dispersion 2 in solution with NaTC/POPC and sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS). [0196]
  • For Example 3, to analyze the concentration of Drug 1 that was highly mobile using NMR, 18 mg of Dispersion 2 was added to 1.8 mLs of deuterated PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC, and the reference standards TSP and [0197] 19F TFA. For Examples 4 through 8, 0.1 wt % of additional lipophilic microphase-forming materials were added. The results are shown in Table 7. Control 2 (Dispersion 2 in deuterated PBS without the lipophilic microphase) is shown again for comparison.
    TABLE 7
    Highly
    Lipophile/ Mobile
    Ex. Drug Drug
    No. Dispersion Drug Lipophilic Microphase Ratio (μg/mL)
    3 2 1 NaTC/POPC 2.0 13.0
    4 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 24.9
    Tween 80 & Capmul
    5 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 32.9
    Cremophor & Capmul
    (40/60)
    6 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 86.7
    Cremophor & Capmul
    (72/28)
    7 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 78.4
    Cremophor & Arlacel
    8 2 1 NaTC/POPC + 2.4 22.8
    SLS
    Control 2 1 none <1
    2
  • The results show that addition of the lipophilic microphase results in greater than 13- to 86-fold increases in highly mobile drug concentrations compared with the control consisting of the dispersion alone. In addition, formulations with a lipophilic microphase-forming material in addition to NaTC/POPC (examples 4 to 8), showed concentration enhancement over the use of NaTC/POPC alone (Example 3), with concentrations of highly mobile drug 1.7-fold to 6.7-fold that provided by Example 3. [0198]
  • Examples 9-12
  • These examples demonstrate concentration enhancement using several different candidate lipophilic microphase-forming materials. In these examples, Dispersion 1 was co-administered to PBS containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material TWEEN 80 (Example 9), Capmul MCM (Example 10), Cremophor RH40 (Example 11), or a 69/31 (wt/wt) mixture of Cremophor RH40/Capmul MCM (Example 12). [0199]
  • For each of these tests, approximately 120 mg of Dispersion 1 was added to 250 mLs of PBS containing 0.5 wt % of the lipophilic microphase-forming material. Dissolution tests were performed as described for Example 1. Results are shown in Table 8. [0200]
    TABLE 8
    Drug 1
    Example Time Concentration AUC
    No. Dispersion (min) (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
     9 1 0 0 0
    5 11 0
    15 28 200
    20 33 400
    35 52 1,000
    45 64 1,600
    60 78 2,700
    75 86 3,900
    90 93 5,200
    120 97 8,100
    180 97 13,900
    1200 91 110,000
    10 1 0 0 0
    5 73 200
    15 89 1,000
    20 90 1,400
    35 94 2,800
    45 94 3,800
    60 94 5,200
    75 91 6,600
    90 90 7,900
    120 84 10,500
    180 75 15,300
    1200 45 76,700
    11 1 0 0 0
    5 9 0
    15 24 200
    20 32 300
    35 50 900
    45 62 1,500
    60 76 2,500
    75 89 3,800
    90 103 5,200
    120 114 8,500
    180 127 15,700
    1200 144 153,800
    12 1 0 0 0
    5 49 100
    15 92 800
    20 101 1,300
    35 111 2,900
    45 112 4,000
    60 113 5,700
    75 112 7,400
    90 112 9,100
    120 113 12,500
    180 111 19,200
    1200 125 139,700
  • The concentrations of drug obtained in these samples were used to determine the C[0201] max180 and the AUC180 during the initial one hundred eighty minutes. The results are shown in Table 9. The results for Control 1 are shown again for comparison.
    TABLE 9
    Lipophile/ AUC180
    Exp. Dis- Lipophilic Drug Cmax180 (min*μg/
    No. persion Drug Microphase Ratio (μg/mL) mL)
     9 1 1 Tween 80 41.7 97 13,900
    10 1 1 Capmul 41.7 94 15,300
    11 1 1 Cremophor 41.7 127 15,700
    12 1 1 Cremophor 41.7 113 19,200
    & Capmul
    Control 1 1 none 64 9,000
     1
  • As can be seen from the data, Examples 9 through 12 provided C[0202] max180 from 1.5-fold to 2.0-fold that of the control, and AUC180 from 1.5-fold to 2.1-fold that of the control.
  • Examples 13-15
  • These examples demonstrate concentration enhancement using Drug 2. The dispersions used in these Examples contained ziprazidone in either the hydrochloride salt from (drug 2A), or the free base form (Drug 2B). Table 3 shows the compositions of Dispersions 3, 4, and 5 with Drug 2A or 2B. Examples 13 through 15 consisted of Dispersions 3 through 5 in solutions with NaTC/POPC as the lipophilic microphase. [0203]
  • For these tests, 3.6 mg of Dispersion 3, 0.78 mg of Dispersion 4, or 0.72 mg of Dispersion 5, was added to microcentrifuge tubes in duplicate. A sufficient amount of each dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 200 μg/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved. The tubes were placed in a 37° C. temperature-controlled chamber, and 1.8 mL PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC was added to each respective tube. The samples were quickly mixed using a vortex mixer for about 60 seconds. The samples were centrifuged at 13,000 G at 37° C. for 1 minute. The resulting supernatant solution was then sampled and diluted 1:6 (by volume) with water/methanol (¼) and then analyzed by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Phenomenex ODS 20 column. The mobile phase consisted of 0.02 M KH[0204] 2PO4, pH 3.0/acetonitrile in the ratio of 60/40 vol/vol. Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 254 nm to the absorbance of Drug 2A or 2B standards. The contents of each respective tube were mixed on the vortex mixer and allowed to stand undisturbed at 37° C. until the next sample was taken. Samples were collected at 4, 10, 20, 40, 90, and 1200 minutes. The results are shown in Table 10.
  • Controls 3-5 [0205]
  • Controls 3 through 5 consisted of Dispersions 3 through 5, respectively, in PBS without the lipophilic microphase. [0206]
    TABLE 10
    Drug 2
    Example Time Concentration AUC
    No. Dispersion (min) (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
    13 3 0 0 0
    4 173 300
    10 168 1,400
    20 133 2,900
    40 108 5,300
    90 59 9,500
    1200 249 180,200
    14 4 0 0 0
    4 12 0
    10 24 100
    20 43 500
    40 47 1,400
    90 25 3,200
    1200 15 25,800
    15 5 0 0 0
    4 74 100
    10 42 500
    20 37 900
    40 21 1,500
    90 16 2,400
    1200 13 18,500
    Control 3 3 0 0 0
    4 23 100
    10 21 200
    20 24 400
    40 20 900
    90 8 1,600
    1200 8 10,900
    Control 4 4 0 0 0
    4 10 0
    10 13 100
    20 16 200
    40 13 500
    90 9 1,100
    1200 4 8,000
    Control 5 5 0 0 0
    4 27 100
    10 23 200
    20 18 400
    40 13 700
    90 7 1,200
    1200 7 8,500
  • The concentrations of drug obtained in these samples were used to determine the C[0207] max90 and the AUC90 during the initial ninety minutes. The results are shown in Table 11.
    TABLE 11
    Lipophile/ AUC180
    Exp. Dis- Lipophilic Drug Cmax180 (min*μg/
    No. persion Drug Microphase Ratio (μg/mL) mL)
    13 3 2A NaTC/POPC 25 173 9500
    Control 3 2A none 24 1600
     3
    14 4 2A NaTC/POPC 25 47 3200
    Control 4 2A none 16 1100
     4
    15 5 2A NaTC/POPC 25 74 2400
    Control 5 2A none 27 1200
     5
  • As can be seen from the data, Examples 3, 4, and 5 provided C[0208] max90 were 7.2-, 2.9-, and 2.7-fold that provided by each respective control. Examples 3, 4, and 5 provided AUC90 values that were 5.9-, 2.9-, and 2.0-fold that provided by each respective control.
  • Examples 16-19
  • Examples 16 through 19 evaluate several lipophilic microphase-forming materials with dispersions containing different drugs and different polymers. Examples 16 through 19 consisted of Dispersions 6 through 9 in solutions with NaTC/POPC or Tween 80 as the lipophilic microphase material. Table 3 shows the compositions of Dispersions 6 through 9. [0209]
  • For Examples 16 and 17, 3.6 mg of Dispersion 6 or Dispersion 7 was added to PBS containing 2 wt % Tween 80 (the Drug 3 concentration would have been 200 μg/mL if all of the drug dissolved). For Example 18, 3.6 mg of Dispersion 8 was added to PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC (the Drug 4 concentration would have been 1000 μg/mL if all of the drug dissolved). For Example 19, 1.8 mg of Dispersion 9 was added to PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC (the Drug 1 concentration would have been 100 μg/mL if all of the drug dissolved). Dissolution tests were performed as described above for Examples 13 through 15. Drug 3 was analyzed by HPLC using a Waters Symmetry C[0210] 18 column. The mobile phase consisted of 0.02 M KH2PO4, pH 3.0/acetonitrile in the ratio of 60/40 vol/vol. Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 208 nm to the absorbance of Drug 3 standards. Drug 4 was analyzed by HPLC using a Zorbax SB C18 column. The mobile phase consisted of water/methanol in the ratio of 35/65 vol/vol. Drug concentration was calculated by comparing UV absorbance at 297 nm to the absorbance of Drug 4 standards. Drug 1 was analyzed by HPLC as described above for Example 1. Drug concentrations versus time are shown in Table 12.
  • Controls 6-9 [0211]
  • Controls 6 through 9 consisted of Dispersions 6 through 9, respectively, in PBS without the lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0212]
    TABLE 12
    Drug
    Example Time Concentration AUC
    No. Dispersion (min) (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
    16 6 0 0 0
    4 143 300
    10 193 1300
    20 206 3300
    40 212 7500
    90 207 18,000
    1200 207 247,800
    0 0 0
    17 7 4 174 300
    10 193 1,400
    20 198 3,400
    40 212 7,500
    90 205 17,900
    1200 217 252,200
    18 8 0 0 0
    4 1019 2,000
    10 982 8,000
    20 1004 18,000
    40 970 37,700
    90 961 86,000
    1200 288 779,400
    19 9 0 0 0
    4 94 200
    10 95 800
    20 85 1,600
    40 80 3,300
    90 66 7,200
    1200 28 63,800
    Control 6 6 0 0 0
    4 159 300
    10 149 1,200
    20 148 2,700
    40 130 5,500
    90 117 11,700
    1200 82 122,300
    Control 7 7 0 0 0
    4 21 0
    10 31 200
    20 43 600
    40 58 1,600
    90 86 5,200
    1200 173 148,900
    Control 8 8 0 0 0
    4 540 1,100
    10 582 4,400
    20 601 10,400
    40 620 22,600
    90 594 52,900
    1200 276 536,000
     Control 11 11  0 0 0
    4 70 100
    10 64 500
    20 59 1,200
    40 50 2,200
    90 42 4,600
    1200 18 37,800
  • The concentrations of drug obtained in these samples were used to determine the C[0213] max90 and the AUC90 during the initial ninety minutes. The results are shown in Table 13.
    TABLE 13
    Lipophilic Lipophile/ Cmax90 AUC90
    Ex. No. Dispersion Drug Polymer Microphase Drug Ratio (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
    16 6 3 CAP Tween 100 212 18,000
    Control 6 3 CAP none 159 11,700
     6
    17 7 3 HPMCAS-MF Tween 100 212 17,900
    Control 7 3 HPMCAS-MF none 86 5200
     7
    18 8 4 HPMCAS-MF NaTC/POPC  5 1019 86,000
    Control 8 4 HPMCAS-MF none 620 52,900
     8
    19 9 1 HPMC NaTC/POPC  50 95 7200
    Control 9 1 HPMC none 70 4600
     9
  • As can be seen from the data, the Examples showed an improvement in C[0214] max90 from 1.3- to 2.5-fold that of each respective control. The Examples showed an improvement in AUC90 from 1.5- to 3.4-fold that of each respective control.
  • Example 20
  • Partition coefficients were measured for Drug 1 in PBS with the lipophilic microphase-forming materials Capmul MCM, a 2.2:1 (wt:wt) mixture of Cremophore RH40/Capmul MCM, Pluronic F127, TWEEN 80, sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS), PEG 6000 distearate, MYRJ 59, Cremophore A25, and NaTC/POPC, using the following method. First, highly mobile Drug 1 concentration was measured for solutions of crystalline Drug 1 and varying concentrations of the lipophilic microphase material, or with Dispersion 2 (25 wt % Drug 1 with HPMCAS-MF). The concentration of Drug 1 versus concentration of lipophilic microphase material was graphed, and the slope was used to determine the partition coefficient of Drug 1 in the lipophilic microphase material from the equation [0215]
  • [Drug]lipophile=[Drug]free ·K p ·X lipophile.
  • For example, to determine the partition coefficient for Drug 1 in a 2.2/1 w/w mixture of Cremophore RH40/Capmul MCM, 2.0 mg of crystalline Drug 1 was added to 2.0 mL of deuterated PBS containing [0216] 19F TFA standard and 0.047 wt %, 0.089 wt %, or 0.164 wt % of a Cremophore RH40/Capmul MCM mixture (2.2/1 wt/wt). Each solution was stirred overnight at 37° C. Highly mobile Drug 1 concentration (free drug and drug in lipophilic microphases) was measured using NMR. The results are shown below in Table 14.
    TABLE 14
    Highly-Mobile
    Drug 1
    Cremophore/Capmul Concentration
    (wt %) (μg/mL)
    0.047 9
    0.089 23
    0.164 53
  • The slope of the data in Table 14, [Drug][0217] lipophile=[Drug]free·Kp·Xlipophile, is 38,000. Dividing this by [Drug]free, 0.010 μg/mL, gives a partition coefficient, Kp, of 3,800,000. Partition coefficients for the remaining lipophilic microphase materials were calculated using similar procedures. The summary of partition coefficients is shown in Table 15.
    TABLE 15
    Partition Coefficient Kp
    Lipophilic Microphase Determined Using Determined Using
    Material Crystalline Drug 1 Dispersion 2
    Capmul MCM 11,000,000
    Cremophor RH40/Capmul MCM 3,800,000 4,700,000
    (2.2/1 wt/wt)
    PEG 6000 distearate 1,400,000
    Cremophore RH40 740,000
    Pluronic F127 400,000
    Tween 80 320,000
    MYRJ 59 300,000
    Cremophor A25 200,000
    SLS 63,000
    NaTC/POPC 33,000
  • The data in Table 15 show that lipophilic microphase-forming materials with a wide range of partition coefficients with Drug 1 are available. The data also show that the partition coefficient measured for Drug 1 and a 2.2/1 (wt/wt) mixture of Cremophor RH40/Capmul MCM when using Dispersion 2 was greater than that measured when using crystalline Drug 1. This is because Dispersion 2 provides an enhanced free drug concentration ([Drug][0218] free) over crystalline Drug 1.
  • Example 21
  • Solutions containing Drug 1 in PBS with lipophilic microphase-forming materials were analyzed using light scattering to determine the size of the lipophilic microphases. To form these solutions, 3 mg Drug 1 was added to 10 mL PBS containing 0.1 wt % Capmul MCM/Tween 80 (3/2), or 0.1 wt % Cremophor RH40/ Capmul MCM (5/2), and equilibrated overnight. Solutions were filtered using a 0.45 μm PTFE syringe filter to remove any undissolved species. Dynamic light-scattering of each of the solutions was measured using a PSS-NICOMP 380 Submicron Particle Sizer, and the size of lipophilic microphases in the solution was calculated. The mean particle sizes (characteristic diameter) for the bulk of particles in solution are shown in Table 16. (The value reported is a volume-weighted mean, assuming a gaussian size distribution, with approximately 85% of the particle volume being within about 30% of the reported size.) [0219]
    TABLE 16
    Lipophilic DLS Mean
    Microphase Lipophile/Drug Particle Size
    (0.1 wt %) Ratio (nm)
    Capmul MCM/ 3.33 14.8
    Tween 80 (3/2)
    Cremophor RH40/ 3.33 17.9
    Capmul MCM (5/2)
  • Example 22
  • The concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 11, comprising 20 wt % Drug 1, 20 wt % Capmul MCM, and 60 wt % HPMCAS-MF, was determined using NMR analysis as follows. A 9.0 mg sample of Dispersion was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and [0220] 19F TFA, as described in Example 2. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 11 as determined by NMR is shown in Table 17. For comparison, the results for Control 2 (Dispersion 2 comprising 25 wt % Drug 1 and 75 wt % HPMCAS-MF) is included in the table. These data show that the concentration of highly mobile Drug 1 provided by Dispersion 11, containing the lipophilic microphase-forming material Capmul MCM, was greater than 980-fold that provided by the control composition that did not contain the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
    TABLE 17
    Highly
    Lipophilic Lipophile/ Mobile
    Example Microphase-Forming Drug Drug 1
    No. Dispersion Material Ratio (μg/mL)
    22 11 Capmul MCM (included 1 980
    in dispersion)
    Control 2 2 none <1
  • Examples 23-25
  • The concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 2, comprising 25 wt % Drug 1 and 75 wt % HPMCAS when co-administered with various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined as follows. A 7.2 mg sample of Dispersion 2 was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and [0221] 19F TFA to which had been added 1.8 mg of the lipophilic microphase-forming materials shown in Table 18. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 2 co-administered with these lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined by NMR using the procedures outlined in Example 2. The results are presented in Table 18, as is the result for Control 2. These data show that the concentration of highly mobile Drug 1 provided by Dispersion 2 and the various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was greater than 2.4- to 360-fold that provided by the control composition that did not contain the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
    TABLE 18
    Highly
    Lipophilic Lipophile/ Mobile
    Example Microphase-Forming Drug Drug 1
    No. Dispersion Material Ratio (μg/mL)
    23 2 PEG Distearate 1 2.4
    24 2 Cremophor/Capmul 1 170
    (5/2 wt/wt)
    25 2 Capmul MCM 1 360
    Control 2 2 None <1
  • Examples 26-28
  • The concentration-enhancement provided by Dispersion 10, comprising 35 wt % Drug 1 and 65 wt % CMEC when co-administered with various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined as follows. A 5.1 mg sample of Dispersion 10 was added to 1.8 mL of deuterated PBS, and the reference standards TSP and [0222] 19F TFA to which had been added 1.8 mg of the lipophilic microphase-forming materials shown in Table 19. The concentration of highly mobile drug provided by Dispersion 10 co-administered with these lipophilic microphase-forming materials was determined by NMR using the procedures outlined in Example 2. The results are presented in Table 18, as is the result for Control 3, which comprised Dispersion 10 without a lipophilic microphase-forming material. These data show that the concentration of highly mobile Drug 1 provided by Dispersion 10 when co-administered with various lipophilic microphase-forming materials was greater than 3.4-fold to 210-fold that provided by the control composition that did not contain the lipophilic microphase-forming material.
    TABLE 19
    Lipophilic Lipophile/ Highly Mobile
    Example Dis- Microphase-Forming Drug Drug 1
    No. persion Material Ratio (μg/mL)
    26 10 PEG Distearate 1 3.4
    24 10 Cremophor/Capmul 1 120
    (5/2 wt/wt)
    28 10 Capmul MCM 1 210
    Control 3 10 none <1
  • Example 29
  • This example demonstrates a lipophilic microphase-forming material adsorbed to a solid substrate. [0223]
  • The lipophilic microphase-forming material was adsorbed to a solid substrate as follows. First, a quantity of calcium silicate (Zeopharm® 600, available from JM Huber Corporation) was dried in a vacuum oven at a temperature of about 100° C. for 5 hours. Next a 69:31 (wt/wt) mixture of Cremophore RH 40:Capmul MCM was prepared. The materials were warmed sufficiently to become liquid, and 6.9 g of Cremophore RH 40 and 3.1 g of Capmul MCM was added to a vial. The mixture was warmed to 37° C. with constant stirring. The mixture was diluted by adding 10 g of methanol (1:1 mass ratio). The resulting solution was agitated and then stirred at room temperature. 1.1952 g of the Cremophore RH 40:Capmul MCM solution and 0.2015 g of calcium silicate were next added to a vial. The materials were mixed to form a slurry and then allowed to dry in a fume hood at room temperature overnight. The vials were then placed in a vacuum desiccator and allowed to dry for about five hours to remove residual methanol. The resulting material was a dry, freely flowing powder having a weight ratio of lipophilic microphase forming material to solid substrate of about 3/1. [0224]
  • Examples 30-31
  • Compositions comprising a solid amorphous dispersion and lipophilic-microphase forming material adsorbed onto a solid substrate were dissolution tested to determine whether the composition provided concentration-enhancement. [0225]
  • For Example 30, 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 was added to microcentrifuge tubes. [0226]
  • For Example 31, 3.6 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 was added to microcentrifuge tubes. [0227]
  • For Example 30, a sufficient amount of dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 980 μg/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved. For Example 31, a sufficient amount of dispersion was added so that the concentration of drug would have been approximately 490 μg/mL, if all of the drug had dissolved. The tubes were placed in a 37° C. temperature-controlled chamber, and 1.8 mL MFDS was added to each respective tube. The,samples were quickly mixed using a vortex mixer for about 90 seconds. The samples were centrifuged at 13,000 G at 37° C. for 2 minutes. The resulting supernatant solution was then sampled and diluted 1:5 (by volume) with methanol and then analyzed by HPLC. The contents of each respective tube were mixed on the vortex mixer and allowed to stand undisturbed at 37° C. until the next sample was taken. Samples were collected at 4, 10, 20, 40, 90, and 1200 minutes. The results are shown in Table 20. [0228]
  • Controls 10-13 [0229]
  • Control 10 consisted of 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 but no lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0230]
  • Control 11 consisted of 3.6 mg of Dispersion 12 but no lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0231]
  • Control 12 consisted of 1.8 mg of crystalline Drug 1 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29. [0232]
  • Control 13 consisted of 0.9 mg of crystalline Drug 1 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29. [0233]
    TABLE 20
    Drug 1
    Time Concentration AUC
    Example No. Dispersion (min) (μg/mL) (min*μg/mL)
    30 12 0 0 0
    4 850 1,710
    10 817 6,710
    20 775 14,600
    40 741 29,700
    90 731 66,500
    31 12 0 0 0
    4 407 821
    10 392 3,220
    20 377 7,070
    40 362 14,500
    90 357 32,800
    Control 10 12 0 0 0
    4 189 364
    10 432 2,200
    20 726 7,960
    40 769 23,000
    90 681 59,800
    Control 11 12 0 0 0
    4 92 194
    10 227 1,170
    20 354 4,080
    40 369 11,300
    90 307 28,200
    Control 12 none 0 0 0
    4 5 11
    10 5 37
    20 5 83
    40 5 182
    90 6 453
    Control 13 none 0 0 0
    4 3 8
    10 3 27
    20 3 61
    40 4 137
    90 4 333
  • The concentrations of drug obtained in these samples were used to determine the C[0234] max90 and the AUC90 during the initial ninety minutes. The results are shown in Table 21.
    TABLE 21
    Lipophile/ AUC90
    Dis- Lipophilic Drug Cmax90 (min*μg/
    Ex. No. persion Drug Microphase Ratio (μg/mL) mL)
    30 12 1 Cremophor/  5 850 66,500
    Capmul
    Control 12 1 none 770 59,300
    10
    Control none 1 Cremophor/  5 6 450
    12 Capmul
    31 12 1 Cremophor/ 10 410 32,400
    Capmul
    Control 12 1 none 370 28,200
    11
    Control none 1 Cremophor/ 10 4 330
    13 Capmul
  • Combining a solid amorphous dispersion and adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material provided greatly enhanced drug concentration relative to controls consisting of equivalent amounts of crystalline drug and lipophilic microphase-forming material. As can be seen from the data, Example 30 provided a C[0235] max 90 that was 1.1-fold and 142-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively. Example 31 provided a Cmax90 that was 1.1- and 102-fold that provided by Controls 11 and 13, respectively. Example 30 provided an AUC90 that was 1.1- and 148-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively. Example 31 provided an AUC90 that was 1.1- and 98-fold that provided by Controls 10 and 12 respectively.
  • Example 32
  • A combination of a solid amorphous dispersion and adsorbed lipophilic-microphase forming material was dosed to aqueous solution and analyzed by NMR using the procedure of Example 2 to determine the amount of highly mobile drug that was present in aqueous solution, compared with dosing a dispersion alone. [0236]
  • For Example 32, 7.2 mg of Dispersion 12 and 12 mg of the adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material of Example 29 were added to 1.8 ml of partially deuterated PBS containing 0.5 wt % NaTC/POPC and a TFA standard (0.0013M [0237] 19F). Samples were held at 37° C. and vortexed for one minute and then transferred to an 8 mm NMR tube. The concentration of drug was determined through integration of drug peaks and comparison with the TFA peaks.
  • Control 14 was the same as Example 32 but contained no adsorbed lipophilic microphase-forming material. [0238]
  • Results are shown in Table 22. [0239]
    TABLE 22
    Mobile
    Ex. Dis- Lipophile/ Drug
    No. persion Drug Lipophilic Microphase Drug Ratio (μg/mL)
    32 12 1 Cremophor/Capmul 5 614
    Con- 12 1 none 14
    trol
    14
  • The results showed that addition of the lipophilic microphase forming material resulted in a 45-fold increase in highly mobile drug concentration compared with the control consisting of the dispersion alone. [0240]
  • The terms and descriptions which have been employed in the foregoing specification are used therein as terms of description and not of limitation, and there is no intention, in the use of such terms and expressions, of excluding equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof, it being recognized that the scope of the invention is defined and limited by the claims which follow. [0241]

Claims (15)

1. A composition comprising:
(a) a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer;
(b) a lipophilic microphase-forming material, said composition having a mass ratio of said lipophilic microphase-forming material to said low-solubility drug of from 0.1 to 100;
(c) said lipophilic microphase-forming material being present in a sufficient amount so that said composition provides concentration enhancement of said drug in a use environment relative to at least one of a first control composition and a second control composition; wherein
(i) said first control composition consists essentially of an equivalent amount of said solid amorphous dispersion with no lipophilic microphase-forming material present;
(ii) said second control composition consists essentially of an equivalent amount of said low-solubility drug in undispersed form with an equivalent amount of said lipophilic, microphase-forming material but with no concentration-enhancing polymer; and
wherein said lipophilic microphase-forming material is water immiscible and said low-solubility drug has a partition coefficient Kp between said use environment and said lipophilic microphase-forming material of at least 0.02 wt %/ Sxstal, where Sxstal is the maximum aqueous solubility of said low-solubility drug in wt %.
2. The composition of claim 1 wherein said lipophilic microphase-forming material forms lipophilic microphases in said use environment having a characteristic diameter of less than about 10 μm.
3. The composition of claim 1 wherein said lipophilic microphase-forming material is selected from the group consisting of medium-chain glyceryl mono-, di-, and tri-alkylates, sorbitan esters, long-chain fatty alcohols, long-chain fatty-acids, phospholipids, mono and diglycerides of capric and caprylic acid, polyoxyethylene 6 apricot kernel oil, polyoxyethylene corn oil, propylene glycol monolaurate, propylene glycol dicaprylate/caprate, polyglyceryl, sorbitan esters of fatty acids, glyceryl monooleate, medium chain triglycerides and long chain triglycerides, and mixtures of mono-, di-, and triglycerides, or lipophilic derivatives of fatty acids such as esters with alkyl alcohols, fractionated coconut oils, vegetable oils, fatty acid esters of alkyl alcohols, alcohols, polyoxyethylene alkylethers, fatty acids, glycerol fatty acid monoesters, glycerol fatty acid diesters, acetylated glycerol fatty acid monoesters, acetylated glycerol fatty acid diesters, lower alcohol fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acid esters, polypropylene glycol fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene glycerides, lactic acid derivatives of monoglycerides, lactic acid derivatives of diglycerides, propylene glycol diglycerides, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers, transesterified vegetable oils, sterols, sterol derivatives, sugar esters, sugar ethers, sucroglycerides, polyoxyethylene vegetable oils, polyoxyethylene hydrogenated vegetable oils, reaction products of polyols and at least one member of the group consisting of fatty acids, glycerides, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, and sterols; and mixtures thereof.
4. The composition of claim 1 wherein said solid amorphous dispersion and said lipophilic microphase-forming material are both present in a single dosage form.
5. The composition of claim 1 wherein said low-solubility drug has an absorption rate constant of at least 0.005 min−1.
6. The composition of claim 1 wherein said lipophilic microphase-forming material is present in a sufficient amount so as to provide a concentration of highly mobile drug that is at least 2-fold that provided by at least one of said first control composition and said second control composition.
7. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides a maximum concentration of dissolved drug in said use environment that is at least 1.25-fold that provided by at least one of said first control composition and said second control composition.
8. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides a dissolution area under the curve in a use environment for any 90-minute period between the time of introduction to the use environment and 270 minutes following introduction to the use environment that is at least 1.25-fold that provided by at least one of said first control composition and said second control composition.
9. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides a relative bioavailability of at least 1.25-fold relative to at least one of said first control composition and said second control composition.
10. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides a fed/fasted relative bioavailability ratio of from 0.5 to 2.0.
11. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides a precipitate ratio of at least 1.25-fold relative to at least one of said first control composition and said second control composition.
12. The composition of claim 1 wherein said composition provides concentration enhancement of said low-solubility drug in said use environment relative to both said first control composition and said second control composition.
13. The composition of claim 1 wherein said drug is selected from the group consisting of antihypertensives, antianxiety agents, anticlotting agents, anticonvulsants, blood glucose-lowering agents, decongestants, antihistamines, antitussives, antineoplastics, beta blockers, anti-inflammatories, antipsychotic agents, cognitive enhancers, anti-atherosclerotic agents, cholesterol-reducing agents, antiobesity agents, autoimmune disorder agents, anti-impotence agents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, hypnotic agents, anti-Parkinsonism agents, anti-Alzheimer's disease agents, antibiotics, anti-depressants, and antiviral agents, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, and cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors.
14. The composition of claim 1 wherein said concentration-enhancing polymer is selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose, and hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, poloxamers, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohols that have at least a portion of their repeat units in hydrolyzed-form, and mixtures thereof.
15. A method for co-administering a solid amorphous dispersion and a lipophilic microphase-forming material in vivo, comprising:
(a) forming a solid amorphous dispersion comprising a low-solubility drug and a concentration-enhancing polymer;
(b) providing a lipophilic microphase-forming material, wherein a mass ratio of said lipophilic microphase-forming material to said low-solubility drug is from 0.1 to 100;
(c) administering said solid amorphous dispersion and said lipophilic microphase-forming material in a sufficient amount so as to provide concentration enhancement of said drug in a use environment relative to at least one of a first control composition and a second control composition; wherein
(i) said first control composition consists essentially of an equivalent amount of said solid amorphous dispersion with no lipophilic microphase-forming material present;
(ii) said second control composition consists essentially of an equivalent amount of said low-solubility drug in undispersed form with an equivalent amount of said lipophilic, microphase-forming material but with no concentration-enhancing polymer; and
wherein said lipophilic microphase-forming material is water immiscible and said low-solubility drug has a partition coefficient Kp between said use environment and said lipophilic microphase-forming material of at least 0.02 wt %/Sxstal, where Sxstal is the maximum aqueous solubility of said low-solubility drug in wt %.
US10/355,747 2002-02-01 2003-01-31 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials Abandoned US20030228358A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/355,747 US20030228358A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-01-31 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US11/924,988 US9486410B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2007-10-26 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US15/268,441 US20170000733A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2016-09-16 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US16/047,965 US10357455B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2018-07-27 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US35408102P 2002-02-01 2002-02-01
US10/355,747 US20030228358A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-01-31 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/924,988 Continuation US9486410B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2007-10-26 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20030228358A1 true US20030228358A1 (en) 2003-12-11

Family

ID=27663287

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/355,747 Abandoned US20030228358A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-01-31 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US11/924,988 Active 2025-04-12 US9486410B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2007-10-26 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US15/268,441 Abandoned US20170000733A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2016-09-16 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US16/047,965 Expired - Lifetime US10357455B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2018-07-27 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/924,988 Active 2025-04-12 US9486410B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2007-10-26 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US15/268,441 Abandoned US20170000733A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2016-09-16 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US16/047,965 Expired - Lifetime US10357455B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2018-07-27 Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Country Status (15)

Country Link
US (4) US20030228358A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1469832B2 (en)
JP (1) JP2005523262A (en)
AR (1) AR038374A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE395044T1 (en)
BR (1) BR0307344A (en)
CA (1) CA2474838C (en)
DE (1) DE60320940D1 (en)
ES (1) ES2305434T3 (en)
MX (1) MXPA04007438A (en)
PA (1) PA8565501A1 (en)
PE (1) PE20030803A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200302739A (en)
UY (1) UY27641A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003063833A1 (en)

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20040091529A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2004-05-13 David Edgren Methods and dosage forms for increasing solubility of drug compositions for controlled delivery
US20040115262A1 (en) * 2002-07-29 2004-06-17 Frank Jao Formulations and dosage forms for controlled delivery of topiramate
US20050058707A1 (en) * 2003-08-06 2005-03-17 Iran Reyes Uniform delivery of topiramate over prolonged period of time with enhanced dispersion formulation
US20050175697A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Novel drug compositions and dosage forms of topiramate
US20050175690A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Novel drug compositions and dosage forms
US20050175696A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Drug granule coatings that impart smear resistance during mechanical compression
US20060014788A1 (en) * 2001-06-21 2006-01-19 Pfizer Inc Self-emulsifying formulations of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors
US20080107733A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2008-05-08 Katja Fastnacht Formulation Obtained From A Powder Mixture Comprising An Inorganic Pigment
US7390503B1 (en) 2003-08-22 2008-06-24 Barr Laboratories, Inc. Ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets
US20080193534A1 (en) * 2005-08-12 2008-08-14 Astrazeneca Ab Process
WO2008097165A1 (en) * 2007-02-09 2008-08-14 Astrazeneca Ab Process for preparation of a stable dispersion of solid amorphous submicron particles in an aqueous medium
US20080221077A1 (en) * 2006-12-12 2008-09-11 Austad Brian C Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US20090098200A1 (en) * 2007-09-25 2009-04-16 Solubest Ltd. Compositions comprising lipophilic active compounds and method for their preparation
US20090169583A1 (en) * 2005-02-08 2009-07-02 Pfizer, Inc. Solid Adsorbates of Hydrophobic Drugs
US20090203709A1 (en) * 2008-02-07 2009-08-13 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical Dosage Form For Oral Administration Of Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitor
US20090218708A1 (en) * 2008-03-03 2009-09-03 Roche Palo Alto Llc Process for preparing concentrated aqueous micellar solutions
WO2010088336A1 (en) * 2009-01-29 2010-08-05 Novartis Ag Solid oral formulations of a pyridopyrimidinone
US7838029B1 (en) 2003-07-31 2010-11-23 Watson Laboratories, Inc. Mirtazapine solid dosage forms
WO2011148253A2 (en) 2010-05-25 2011-12-01 Aurobindo Pharma Limited Solid dosage forms of antipsychotics
WO2012122279A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US8268349B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2012-09-18 Abbott Laboratories Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US20120252819A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2012-10-04 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US8377952B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2013-02-19 Abbott Laboratories Solid pharmaceutical dosage formulation
US20140171441A1 (en) * 2005-02-03 2014-06-19 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions with enhanced performance
US8778922B2 (en) 2009-01-08 2014-07-15 Lipocine Inc. Steroidal compositions
US9034858B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2015-05-19 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9358241B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2016-06-07 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9393192B2 (en) 2002-07-29 2016-07-19 Alza Corporation Methods and dosage forms for controlled delivery of paliperidone and risperidone
US9498485B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2016-11-22 Lipocine Inc. Bioavailable solid state (17-β)-hydroxy-4-androsten-3-one esters
WO2017030605A3 (en) * 2014-12-04 2017-06-22 Thomas Manning Tablet composition for anti-tuberculosis antibiotics
USRE47033E1 (en) * 2003-08-04 2018-09-11 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of adsorbates of amorphous drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US20180311362A1 (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Nitto Denko Corporation Transdermal absorption preparation
US10561615B2 (en) 2010-12-10 2020-02-18 Lipocine Inc. Testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11433083B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2022-09-06 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11559530B2 (en) 2016-11-28 2023-01-24 Lipocine Inc. Oral testosterone undecanoate therapy
US11707467B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2023-07-25 Lipocine Inc. (17-ß)-3-oxoandrost-4-en-17YL tridecanoate compositions and methods of their preparation and use
US20230285352A1 (en) * 2018-11-14 2023-09-14 The Trustees Of Princeton University Dihydromyricetin Hot Melt Extrusion Formulations and Methods for Forming Them

Families Citing this family (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5767429B2 (en) 1999-11-12 2015-08-19 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Crystallization inhibitors in solid dispersants
EP1469832B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2016-10-26 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
CN1309370C (en) 2002-02-01 2007-04-11 辉瑞产品公司 Method for making homogeneous spray-dried solid amorphous drug dispersions utilizing modified spray-drying apparatus
WO2004050655A1 (en) * 2002-12-04 2004-06-17 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Limited Polymorphic forms of ziprasidone and its hydrochloride
AU2003300814A1 (en) 2002-12-04 2004-06-23 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Inc. Polymorphic forms of ziprasidone and its hydrochloride
WO2005000869A1 (en) * 2003-05-29 2005-01-06 Washington University Neuroactive 13,24-cyclo-18,21-dinorcholanes and structurally-related pentacyclic steroids
CL2004001884A1 (en) * 2003-08-04 2005-06-03 Pfizer Prod Inc DRYING PROCEDURE FOR SPRAYING FOR THE FORMATION OF SOLID DISPERSIONS AMORPHES OF A PHARMACO AND POLYMERS.
US20050048112A1 (en) * 2003-08-28 2005-03-03 Jorg Breitenbach Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8784869B2 (en) 2003-11-11 2014-07-22 Mattern Pharma Ag Controlled release delivery system for nasal applications and methods of treatment
PT1530965E (en) 2003-11-11 2006-05-31 Udo Mattern ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLED LIBERATION OF SEXUAL HORMONES FOR NASAL APPLICATION
JP2007513143A (en) * 2003-12-04 2007-05-24 ファイザー・プロダクツ・インク Spray coagulation process for producing multiparticulate azithromycin compositions preferably using poloxamer and glycerides using an extruder
BRPI0417348A (en) * 2003-12-04 2007-03-13 Pfizer Prod Inc spray gelatinization process using an extruder for preparing multiparticulate crystalline drug compositions preferably containing a poloxamer and a glyceride
RU2007106036A (en) 2004-08-31 2008-10-10 Пфайзер Продактс Инк. (Us) ANTIBODY TO CD40: DRUG AND METHODS
MX2008001210A (en) * 2005-07-28 2008-03-24 Otsuka Pharma Co Ltd Pharmaceutical composition comprising 2 , 3-dihydro-6-nitroimidaz o [2 , 1-b] oxazole derivatives.
PT2068825E (en) 2006-10-04 2011-02-11 M & P Patent Ag Controlled release delivery system for nasal application of neurotransmitters
MY153057A (en) 2007-02-02 2014-12-31 Pfizer Prod Inc Tryclic compounds,compositions and methods
AR086400A1 (en) 2011-05-13 2013-12-11 Trimel Pharmaceuticals Corp FORMULATIONS IN INTRANASAL GEL OF TESTOSTERONE IN DOSE OF LOWER POWER AND USE OF THE SAME FOR THE TREATMENT OF ANORGASMIA OR THE DISORDER OF HYPOACTIVE SEXUAL DESIRE
US20130045958A1 (en) 2011-05-13 2013-02-21 Trimel Pharmaceuticals Corporation Intranasal 0.15% and 0.24% testosterone gel formulations and use thereof for treating anorgasmia or hypoactive sexual desire disorder
US9757388B2 (en) 2011-05-13 2017-09-12 Acerus Pharmaceuticals Srl Intranasal methods of treating women for anorgasmia with 0.6% and 0.72% testosterone gels
FR2997605B1 (en) * 2012-11-08 2015-12-11 Rhodia Operations AQUEOUS SUSPENSIONS FOR AGRICULTURAL COMPOSITIONS
US11744838B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-09-05 Acerus Biopharma Inc. Methods of treating hypogonadism with transnasal testosterone bio-adhesive gel formulations in male with allergic rhinitis, and methods for preventing an allergic rhinitis event
ES2967689T3 (en) 2018-04-06 2024-05-03 Capsugel Belgium Nv Spray drying process for low aspect ratio particles comprising poly[(methyl methacrylate)-co-(methacrylic acid)]
AU2020310120A1 (en) 2019-07-08 2022-03-03 Belite Bio, Llc Formulations of RBP4 inhibitors and methods of use

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6191162B1 (en) * 1998-05-28 2001-02-20 Medical Research Institute Method of reducing serum glucose levels
US20010053791A1 (en) * 2000-03-16 2001-12-20 Babcock Walter C. Glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor
US6436441B1 (en) * 1992-09-18 2002-08-20 Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Hydrogel-forming sustained-release preparation

Family Cites Families (103)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA1146866A (en) * 1979-07-05 1983-05-24 Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd. Process for the production of sustained release pharmaceutical composition of solid medical material
DE3485000D1 (en) * 1983-06-28 1991-10-10 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd GROUND MIX.
US4581232A (en) * 1983-07-20 1986-04-08 Warner-Lambert Company Magnesium trisilicate suitable for preparation of medicament adsorbates
GB8413191D0 (en) * 1984-05-23 1984-06-27 Beecham Group Plc Pharmaceutical composition
US5639724A (en) * 1984-07-24 1997-06-17 Sandoz Ltd. Cyclosporin galenic forms
EP0179583A1 (en) * 1984-10-04 1986-04-30 Merck & Co. Inc. A system for enhancing the water dissolution rate and solubility of poorly soluble drugs
IE63321B1 (en) * 1986-02-03 1995-04-05 Elan Corp Plc Drug delivery system
US4717565A (en) * 1986-03-27 1988-01-05 Warner-Lambert Company Process for the preparation of medicament adsorbates
US4711774A (en) * 1986-03-27 1987-12-08 Warner-Lambert Company Medicament adsorbates with complex magnesium aluminum silicate and their preparation
US4716033A (en) * 1986-03-27 1987-12-29 Warner-Lambert Company Medicament adsorbates with surfactant and their preparation
US5015479A (en) * 1987-02-02 1991-05-14 Seamus Mulligan Sustained release capsule or tablet formulation comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable dihydropyridine
US4835186A (en) * 1987-06-15 1989-05-30 American Home Products Corporation Spray dried ibuprofen
IT1216570B (en) * 1988-04-08 1990-03-08 Vectorpharma Int CONTROLLED RELEASE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION AND PROCEDURE FOR THEIR PREPARATION.
JP2792862B2 (en) 1988-07-30 1998-09-03 寛治 高田 Oral enteric formulation
SE8803935L (en) 1988-10-31 1990-05-01 Kabivitrum Ab LAEKEMEDELSKOMPOSITION
IT1227626B (en) * 1988-11-28 1991-04-23 Vectorpharma Int SUPPORTED DRUGS WITH INCREASED DISSOLUTION SPEED AND PROCEDURE FOR THEIR PREPARATION
IE60458B1 (en) 1989-10-26 1994-07-13 Elan Corp Plc Enhanced bioavailability adsorbates
US5300302A (en) * 1990-10-04 1994-04-05 Nestec S.A. Pharmaceutical composition in gel form in a dispensing package
FR2679467B1 (en) * 1991-07-26 1993-10-15 Oreal SOLID DISPERSION OF AT LEAST ONE POLYHYDRIC ALCOHOL IN AN ANHYDROUS MEDIUM AND PREPARATION METHOD.
US5225204A (en) * 1991-11-05 1993-07-06 Chen Jivn Ren Stable dosage of levothyroxine sodium and process of production
DE69222182T2 (en) * 1991-12-18 1998-02-26 Warner Lambert Co METHOD FOR PRODUCING A SOLID DISPERSION
US5281420A (en) * 1992-05-19 1994-01-25 The Procter & Gamble Company Solid dispersion compositions of tebufelone
AU4198793A (en) * 1992-07-24 1994-01-27 Takeda Chemical Industries Ltd. Microparticle preparation and production thereof
US5700485A (en) * 1992-09-10 1997-12-23 Children's Medical Center Corporation Prolonged nerve blockade by the combination of local anesthetic and glucocorticoid
US6312704B1 (en) * 1993-09-30 2001-11-06 Gattefosse, S.A. Orally administrable composition capable of providing enhanced bioavailability when ingested
US5559158A (en) * 1993-10-01 1996-09-24 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical composition
US5773021A (en) * 1994-03-14 1998-06-30 Vetoquinol S.A. Bioadhesive ophthalmic insert
JPH07291854A (en) 1994-04-26 1995-11-07 Tanabe Seiyaku Co Ltd Medicinal preparation improved in solubility
WO1995030420A1 (en) * 1994-05-06 1995-11-16 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Use of vitamin e tocopheryl derivatives in ophthalmic compositions
AU4314196A (en) 1994-12-21 1996-07-10 Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Solid composition with improved solubility and absorbability
US5626878A (en) * 1995-01-10 1997-05-06 Warner Lambert Company Reduction of electrostatic forces between magnesium trisilicate adsorbates
SI9500059A (en) 1995-02-23 1996-08-31 Lek Tovarna Farmacevtskih Process for preparing of solid surface dispersions amorfous, in aqueous mediums poorly dissolved agents and their use
BE1009856A5 (en) * 1995-07-14 1997-10-07 Sandoz Sa Pharmaceutical composition in the form of a solid release including macrolide and a vehicle.
ATE240734T1 (en) * 1995-07-26 2003-06-15 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kk PREPARATION OF XANTHINDERIVATES AS A SOLID DISPERSION
TW487582B (en) 1995-08-11 2002-05-21 Nissan Chemical Ind Ltd Method for converting sparingly water-soluble medical substance to amorphous state
JPH0991854A (en) 1995-09-25 1997-04-04 Alpine Electron Inc Disk player
DE19610932A1 (en) * 1996-03-20 1997-09-25 Bayer Ag 2-aryl substituted pyridines
US5993858A (en) * 1996-06-14 1999-11-30 Port Systems L.L.C. Method and formulation for increasing the bioavailability of poorly water-soluble drugs
DE19627430A1 (en) * 1996-07-08 1998-01-15 Bayer Ag Bicyclic condensed pyridines
HRP970330B1 (en) * 1996-07-08 2004-06-30 Bayer Ag Cycloalkano pyridines
DE19627431A1 (en) * 1996-07-08 1998-01-15 Bayer Ag Heterocyclically fused pyridines
US6207671B1 (en) * 1996-07-08 2001-03-27 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Cycloalkano-pyridines
AR008789A1 (en) 1996-07-31 2000-02-23 Bayer Corp PIRIDINES AND SUBSTITUTED BIPHENYLS
TW426516B (en) 1996-12-06 2001-03-21 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co An oral pharmaceutical composition in solid dispersion containing water-insoluble tricyclic compounds
FR2758461A1 (en) 1997-01-17 1998-07-24 Pharma Pass PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION HAVING HIGH BIOAVAILABILITY AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
FR2758459B1 (en) 1997-01-17 1999-05-07 Pharma Pass FENOFIBRATE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION HAVING HIGH BIODAVAILABILITY AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
DE19704243A1 (en) 1997-02-05 1998-08-06 Bayer Ag New 2-amino-substituted pyridines
DE19704244A1 (en) * 1997-02-05 1998-08-06 Bayer Ag 5-hydroxy-alkyl substituted phenyls
JP2894445B2 (en) * 1997-02-12 1999-05-24 日本たばこ産業株式会社 Compounds effective as CETP activity inhibitors
US6306434B1 (en) 1997-02-12 2001-10-23 Chong Kun Dang Corp. Pharmaceutical composition comprising cyclosporin solid-state microemulsion
BR9807858A (en) 1997-02-26 2000-02-22 Pfizer Amide derivatives of heteroarylhexanoic acid, their preparations and uses as selective inhibitors of mip-1.alpha binding to their ccr1 receptors
DE19709125A1 (en) 1997-03-06 1998-09-10 Bayer Ag Substituted quinolines
DE69808463T2 (en) * 1997-07-29 2003-06-26 Pharmacia & Upjohn Co., Kalamazoo SELF-MULULATING FORMULATION CONTAINING ACID LIPOPHILE COMPOUNDS
EP0901786B1 (en) * 1997-08-11 2007-06-13 Pfizer Products Inc. Solid pharmaceutical dispersions with enhanced bioavailability
HN1998000115A (en) 1997-08-21 1999-06-02 Warner Lambert Co SOLID PHARMACEUTICAL DOSAGE FORMS
WO1999014204A1 (en) 1997-09-16 1999-03-25 G.D. Searle & Co. Substituted 1,2,4-triazoles useful for inhibiting cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity
MA24643A1 (en) 1997-09-18 1999-04-01 Bayer Ag SUBSTITUTED TETRAHYDRO-NAPHTHALENES AND SIMILAR COMPOUNDS
DE19741051A1 (en) 1997-09-18 1999-03-25 Bayer Ag New tetrahydroquinoline derivatives useful in treatment of raised lipid levels and arteriosclerosis
DE19741400A1 (en) 1997-09-19 1999-03-25 Bayer Ag New benzyl-biphenyl derivatives
DE19741399A1 (en) * 1997-09-19 1999-03-25 Bayer Ag New tetrahydroquinoline derivatives useful in treatment of elevated lipid levels and arteriosclerosis
FR2772271B1 (en) * 1997-12-11 2000-09-01 Union Pharma Scient Appl NEW PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION WITH ANALGESIC ACTIVITY
KR100385529B1 (en) 1998-02-05 2003-05-27 화이자 프로덕츠 인코포레이티드 Novel dihydroxyhexanoic acid derivatives
WO1999041237A1 (en) 1998-02-13 1999-08-19 G.D. Searle & Co. Substituted pyridines useful for inhibiting cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity
US20010025046A1 (en) 1999-06-24 2001-09-27 Rong(Ron) Liu Self-emulsifying systems containing anticancer medicament
KR100336090B1 (en) 1998-06-27 2002-05-27 윤승원 Solid dispersed preparation of poorly water-soluble drug containing oil, fatty acid or mixture thereof
JP2000016934A (en) 1998-06-30 2000-01-18 Eisai Co Ltd Tablets including teprenone
DE69942205D1 (en) * 1998-08-13 2010-05-12 Cima Labs Inc Microemulsions as solid dosage forms for oral administration
US6376481B2 (en) * 1998-09-02 2002-04-23 Mcneil-Ppc, Inc. Sterol esters in tableted solid dosage forms
US6140342A (en) * 1998-09-17 2000-10-31 Pfizer Inc. Oxy substituted 4-carboxyamino-2-methyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolines
US6147089A (en) * 1998-09-17 2000-11-14 Pfizer Inc. Annulated 4-carboxyamino-2-methyl-1,2,3,4,-tetrahydroquinolines
US6197786B1 (en) * 1998-09-17 2001-03-06 Pfizer Inc 4-Carboxyamino-2-substituted-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolines
GT199900147A (en) * 1998-09-17 1999-09-06 1, 2, 3, 4- TETRAHIDROQUINOLINAS 2-SUBSTITUTED 4-AMINO SUBSTITUTED.
US6147090A (en) * 1998-09-17 2000-11-14 Pfizer Inc. 4-carboxyamino-2-methyl-1,2,3,4,-tetrahydroquinolines
WO2000018723A1 (en) 1998-09-25 2000-04-06 Monsanto Company Substituted n-aliphatic-n-aromatic tertiary-heteroalkylamines useful for inhibiting cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity
CA2345103C (en) 1998-09-25 2011-04-26 Monsanto Company (r)-chiral halogenated 1-substitutedamino-(n+1)-alkanols useful for inhibiting cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity
AU2157400A (en) 1998-12-23 2000-07-31 G.D. Searle & Co. Combinations of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors and hmg coa reductase inhibitors for cardiovascular indications
ES2306646T3 (en) * 1999-02-09 2008-11-16 Pfizer Products Inc. COMPOSITIONS OF BASIC PHARMACOS WITH INCREASED BIODISPONIBILITY.
EP1027887B1 (en) 1999-02-10 2008-08-13 Pfizer Products Inc. Matrix controlled release device
DE60042352D1 (en) 1999-02-10 2009-07-23 Pfizer Prod Inc Osmotic system for administering active substances containing solid amorphous dispersions
ATE400252T1 (en) * 1999-02-10 2008-07-15 Pfizer Prod Inc PHARMACEUTICAL SOLID DISPERSIONS
US6294192B1 (en) * 1999-02-26 2001-09-25 Lipocine, Inc. Triglyceride-free compositions and methods for improved delivery of hydrophobic therapeutic agents
EG23951A (en) 1999-03-25 2008-01-29 Otsuka Pharma Co Ltd Cilostazol preparation
KR100342943B1 (en) 1999-08-04 2002-07-02 민경윤 Non-crystalline cefuroxime axetil solid dispersant, process for preparing same and composition for oral administration comprising same
GB9920558D0 (en) 1999-08-31 1999-11-03 Bradford Particle Design Ltd Methods for particle formation and their products
US6264981B1 (en) 1999-10-27 2001-07-24 Anesta Corporation Oral transmucosal drug dosage using solid solution
CO5271716A1 (en) 1999-11-30 2003-04-30 Pfizer Prod Inc CRYSTALS OF 4- CARBOXAMINE 1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROQUINOLINE 2- REPLACED
NZ513964A (en) 1999-12-08 2004-01-30 Pharmacia Corp Solid-state form of celecoxib having enhanced bioavailability
KR100694667B1 (en) 1999-12-08 2007-03-14 동아제약주식회사 Antifungal compositions containing itraconazole with both improved bioavailability and narrow intra- and inter-individual variation of its absorption
CA2395231C (en) 1999-12-23 2006-08-15 Pfizer Products Inc. Hydrogel-driven layered drug dosage form
JP4100910B2 (en) 1999-12-23 2008-06-11 ファイザー・プロダクツ・インク Hydrogel-driven drug dosage form
EP1712222A3 (en) * 1999-12-23 2012-06-20 Pfizer Products Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions providing enhanced drug concentrations
CA2396640A1 (en) 2000-01-28 2001-08-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Electrospun pharmaceutical compositions
PE20011184A1 (en) 2000-03-16 2001-11-15 Pfizer Prod Inc PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS OF GLUCOGENO-PHOSPHORYLASE INHIBITORS
EP1289560A1 (en) 2000-06-12 2003-03-12 SmithKline Beecham Corporation Novel solid dispersion compositions
US7115279B2 (en) * 2000-08-03 2006-10-03 Curatolo William J Pharmaceutical compositions of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors
US6602523B1 (en) * 2000-08-17 2003-08-05 Technology Holding, Llc. Composite material and process for increasing bioavailability and activity of a beneficial agent
JP2005500314A (en) * 2001-06-21 2005-01-06 ファイザー・プロダクツ・インク Self-emulsifying formulation of cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitor
EA006777B1 (en) 2001-06-22 2006-04-28 Пфайзер Продактс Инк. Pharmaceutical compositions of adsorbates of amorphous drug
JP2004534811A (en) * 2001-06-22 2004-11-18 ファイザー・プロダクツ・インク Pharmaceutical composition comprising a polymer and drug assembly
KR100425226B1 (en) 2001-07-03 2004-03-30 주식회사 팜트리 Compositions and preparation methods for bioavailable oral aceclofenac dosage forms
US6878693B2 (en) * 2001-09-28 2005-04-12 Solubest Ltd. Hydrophilic complexes of lipophilic materials and an apparatus and method for their production
WO2003041690A2 (en) * 2001-10-29 2003-05-22 Therics, Inc. Three-dimensional suspension printing of dosage forms
EP1469832B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2016-10-26 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6436441B1 (en) * 1992-09-18 2002-08-20 Yamanouchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Hydrogel-forming sustained-release preparation
US6191162B1 (en) * 1998-05-28 2001-02-20 Medical Research Institute Method of reducing serum glucose levels
US20010053791A1 (en) * 2000-03-16 2001-12-20 Babcock Walter C. Glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor

Cited By (80)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060014788A1 (en) * 2001-06-21 2006-01-19 Pfizer Inc Self-emulsifying formulations of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors
US20040091529A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2004-05-13 David Edgren Methods and dosage forms for increasing solubility of drug compositions for controlled delivery
US20040115262A1 (en) * 2002-07-29 2004-06-17 Frank Jao Formulations and dosage forms for controlled delivery of topiramate
US9393192B2 (en) 2002-07-29 2016-07-19 Alza Corporation Methods and dosage forms for controlled delivery of paliperidone and risperidone
US7838029B1 (en) 2003-07-31 2010-11-23 Watson Laboratories, Inc. Mirtazapine solid dosage forms
US20110046115A1 (en) * 2003-07-31 2011-02-24 Watson Laboratories, Inc. Mirtazapine Solid Dosage Forms
USRE47033E1 (en) * 2003-08-04 2018-09-11 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of adsorbates of amorphous drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US20050058707A1 (en) * 2003-08-06 2005-03-17 Iran Reyes Uniform delivery of topiramate over prolonged period of time with enhanced dispersion formulation
US7390503B1 (en) 2003-08-22 2008-06-24 Barr Laboratories, Inc. Ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets
US8333990B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2012-12-18 Abbott Laboratories Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8268349B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2012-09-18 Abbott Laboratories Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8691878B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2014-04-08 Abbvie Inc. Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8309613B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2012-11-13 Abbvie Inc. Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8399015B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2013-03-19 Abbvie Inc. Solid pharmaceutical dosage form
US8377952B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2013-02-19 Abbott Laboratories Solid pharmaceutical dosage formulation
US20050175697A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Novel drug compositions and dosage forms of topiramate
US20050175696A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Drug granule coatings that impart smear resistance during mechanical compression
US20050175690A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2005-08-11 David Edgren Novel drug compositions and dosage forms
US20080107733A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2008-05-08 Katja Fastnacht Formulation Obtained From A Powder Mixture Comprising An Inorganic Pigment
US20140171441A1 (en) * 2005-02-03 2014-06-19 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions with enhanced performance
US9387252B2 (en) * 2005-02-03 2016-07-12 Bend Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions with enhanced performance
US20090169583A1 (en) * 2005-02-08 2009-07-02 Pfizer, Inc. Solid Adsorbates of Hydrophobic Drugs
US20080193534A1 (en) * 2005-08-12 2008-08-14 Astrazeneca Ab Process
US8357676B2 (en) 2006-12-12 2013-01-22 Infinity Discovery, Inc. Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US7947670B2 (en) 2006-12-12 2011-05-24 Infinity Pharmaceuticals Inc. Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US20080221077A1 (en) * 2006-12-12 2008-09-11 Austad Brian C Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US8283343B2 (en) 2006-12-12 2012-10-09 Infinity Pharmaceuticals Inc. Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US20090062528A1 (en) * 2006-12-12 2009-03-05 Austad Brian C Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
US20090069281A1 (en) * 2006-12-12 2009-03-12 Austad Brian C Ansamycin formulations and methods of use thereof
WO2008097165A1 (en) * 2007-02-09 2008-08-14 Astrazeneca Ab Process for preparation of a stable dispersion of solid amorphous submicron particles in an aqueous medium
US20100068287A1 (en) * 2007-02-09 2010-03-18 Astrazeneca Ab Process for Preparation of a Stable Dispersion of Solid Amorphous Submicron Particles in an Aqueous Medium
US20090098200A1 (en) * 2007-09-25 2009-04-16 Solubest Ltd. Compositions comprising lipophilic active compounds and method for their preparation
US9254268B2 (en) 2007-09-25 2016-02-09 Solubest Ltd. Compositions comprising lipophilic active compounds and method for their preparation
EP2601935A1 (en) 2007-09-25 2013-06-12 Solubest Ltd. Compositions comprising lipophilic active compounds and method for their preparation
US20090203709A1 (en) * 2008-02-07 2009-08-13 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical Dosage Form For Oral Administration Of Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitor
US20090218708A1 (en) * 2008-03-03 2009-09-03 Roche Palo Alto Llc Process for preparing concentrated aqueous micellar solutions
US11052096B2 (en) 2009-01-08 2021-07-06 Lipocine Inc. Steroidal compositions
US8865695B2 (en) 2009-01-08 2014-10-21 Lipocine Inc. Steroidal compositions
US8778922B2 (en) 2009-01-08 2014-07-15 Lipocine Inc. Steroidal compositions
US11304960B2 (en) 2009-01-08 2022-04-19 Chandrashekar Giliyar Steroidal compositions
AU2010208270B2 (en) * 2009-01-29 2014-01-16 Novartis Ag Solid oral formulations of a pyridopyrimidinone
CN102300559A (en) * 2009-01-29 2011-12-28 诺瓦提斯公司 Solid oral formulations of a pyridopyrimidinone
WO2010088336A1 (en) * 2009-01-29 2010-08-05 Novartis Ag Solid oral formulations of a pyridopyrimidinone
WO2011148253A2 (en) 2010-05-25 2011-12-01 Aurobindo Pharma Limited Solid dosage forms of antipsychotics
US10881671B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2021-01-05 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US10973833B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2021-04-13 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11364250B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2022-06-21 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11311555B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2022-04-26 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9358241B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2016-06-07 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11433083B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2022-09-06 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US10799513B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2020-10-13 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9480690B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2016-11-01 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US10716794B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2020-07-21 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US10226473B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2019-03-12 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9034858B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2015-05-19 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9757390B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2017-09-12 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9943527B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2018-04-17 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9949985B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2018-04-24 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US9205057B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2015-12-08 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US11364249B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2022-06-21 Lipocine Inc. High-strength testosterone undecanoate compositions
US10561615B2 (en) 2010-12-10 2020-02-18 Lipocine Inc. Testosterone undecanoate compositions
US20120252819A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2012-10-04 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
EP2654726A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2013-10-30 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
EP2654726A4 (en) * 2011-03-08 2013-10-30 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
WO2012122279A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US8591944B2 (en) 2011-03-08 2013-11-26 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US20130231350A1 (en) * 2011-03-08 2013-09-05 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US8409560B2 (en) * 2011-03-08 2013-04-02 Zalicus Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Solid dispersion formulations and methods of use thereof
US9757389B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2017-09-12 Lipocine Inc. Bioavailable solid state (17-β)-hydroxy-4-androsten-3-one esters
US11298365B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2022-04-12 Lipocine Inc. Bioavailable solid state (17-β)-hydroxy-4-androsten-3-one esters
US11707467B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2023-07-25 Lipocine Inc. (17-ß)-3-oxoandrost-4-en-17YL tridecanoate compositions and methods of their preparation and use
US9498485B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2016-11-22 Lipocine Inc. Bioavailable solid state (17-β)-hydroxy-4-androsten-3-one esters
US11872235B1 (en) 2014-08-28 2024-01-16 Lipocine Inc. Bioavailable solid state (17-β)-Hydroxy-4-Androsten-3-one esters
WO2017030605A3 (en) * 2014-12-04 2017-06-22 Thomas Manning Tablet composition for anti-tuberculosis antibiotics
US11559530B2 (en) 2016-11-28 2023-01-24 Lipocine Inc. Oral testosterone undecanoate therapy
US20180311362A1 (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Nitto Denko Corporation Transdermal absorption preparation
US11179469B2 (en) * 2017-04-28 2021-11-23 Nitto Denko Corporation Transdermal absorption preparation
TWI741168B (en) * 2017-04-28 2021-10-01 日商日東電工股份有限公司 Transdermal absorption preparation
CN108785286A (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-13 日东电工株式会社 Transdermal absorption formulation
US20230285352A1 (en) * 2018-11-14 2023-09-14 The Trustees Of Princeton University Dihydromyricetin Hot Melt Extrusion Formulations and Methods for Forming Them

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1469832A1 (en) 2004-10-27
PA8565501A1 (en) 2003-09-05
WO2003063833A1 (en) 2003-08-07
US20180338915A1 (en) 2018-11-29
US10357455B2 (en) 2019-07-23
TW200302739A (en) 2003-08-16
UY27641A1 (en) 2003-08-29
BR0307344A (en) 2004-12-14
CA2474838C (en) 2009-01-06
MXPA04007438A (en) 2004-10-11
EP1469832B2 (en) 2016-10-26
JP2005523262A (en) 2005-08-04
US20080063708A1 (en) 2008-03-13
US20170000733A1 (en) 2017-01-05
AR038374A1 (en) 2005-01-12
DE60320940D1 (en) 2008-06-26
US9486410B2 (en) 2016-11-08
ES2305434T3 (en) 2008-11-01
ATE395044T1 (en) 2008-05-15
CA2474838A1 (en) 2003-08-07
EP1469832B1 (en) 2008-05-14
PE20030803A1 (en) 2003-09-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10357455B2 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
USRE47033E1 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions of adsorbates of amorphous drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials
US9339467B2 (en) Method for making homogeneous spray-dried solid amorphous drug dispersions utilizing modified spray-drying apparatus
US7780988B2 (en) Method for making homogeneous spray-dried solid amorphous drug dispersions using pressure nozzles
US8026286B2 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions providing enhanced drug concentrations
AU2003239463A1 (en) Method for making homogeneous spray-dried solid amorphous drug dispersions using pressure nozzles
EP1920766B1 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions of amorphous dispersions of drugs and lipophilic microphase-forming materials

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: BEND RESEARCH, INC., OREGON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PFIZER INC.;PFIZER PRODUCTS INC.;REEL/FRAME:021998/0880;SIGNING DATES FROM 20081103 TO 20081104

Owner name: BEND RESEARCH, INC.,OREGON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PFIZER INC.;PFIZER PRODUCTS INC.;SIGNING DATES FROM 20081103 TO 20081104;REEL/FRAME:021998/0880

Owner name: BEND RESEARCH, INC., OREGON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PFIZER INC.;PFIZER PRODUCTS INC.;SIGNING DATES FROM 20081103 TO 20081104;REEL/FRAME:021998/0880

AS Assignment

Owner name: LONZA BEND INC., OREGON

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:BEND RESEARCH, INC.;REEL/FRAME:062971/0292

Effective date: 20230101